Wise Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/withdrawal-method/wise/ We provide reviews, ratings, and the latest news for Proprietary Trading Firms. Wed, 16 Apr 2025 08:29:30 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.1 https://forexpropreviews.com/wp-content/uploads/2021/04/cropped-Icon-1-32x32.png Wise Archives - Forex Prop Reviews https://forexpropreviews.com/withdrawal-method/wise/ 32 32 FundedNext Review (120% Refund Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fundednext/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=fundednext https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fundednext/#comments Thu, 02 Sep 2021 19:40:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=5551 FundedNext promotes the success of traders in their trading endeavors. They prioritize clients who demonstrate discipline, effective risk management, and a commitment to long-term consistency in their trading careers. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This […]

The post FundedNext Review (120% Refund Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

FundedNext promotes the success of traders in their trading endeavors. They prioritize clients who demonstrate discipline, effective risk management, and a commitment to long-term consistency in their trading careers. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are FundedNext?

FundedNext is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name GrowthNext F.Z.C that was incorporated on the 18th of March, 2022. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by CEO Abdullah Jayed. FundedNext provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, two two-step evaluations, and a one-step evaluation while developing their FundedNext Server as their broker.

FundedNext’s headquarters are located at Office no. 7, AI Robotics HUB, C1 Building, AFZ, Ajman, United Arab Emirates.

Who is the CEO of FundedNext?

Abdullah Jayed is globally recognized as one of the most promising young entrepreneurs in the digital sector and the retail trading industry. He founded Jayed Corp back in 2016 with the intention of creating opportunities for employment on a global basis and additionally simplifying people’s lives.

He is very well known for founding the following projects: Growth Alliance, MoneyBackFX, and eComChef, which all became leading companies within the market in a short period of time. Additionally, after finding major success in the retail trading industry, he also founded FundedNext, which is a multi-million dollar proprietary trading firm that has become an extremely attractive opportunity inside the proprietary trading firm industry.

One of Jayed’s beliefs is that every young and enthusiastic individual should chase their dreams in order to reach their goals. This can be clearly seen in his FundedNext project, where he is encouraging traders with a solid trading strategy to test themselves and receive funding upon being successful in the evaluation. This way, traders can access larger amounts of capital and earn percentage-based profit splits as a reward for their hard work and dedication.

Anyone interested in following Abdullah Jayed can do so by following his Instagram and LinkedIn. This way, you will be able to see more of his posts and what he’s up to on a daily basis.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

FundedNext provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Stellar Challenge
  • One-step Stellar Challenge
  • Stellar Lite Challenge

Two-step Stellar Challenge

FundedNext’s Two-step Stellar Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $6,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Stellar Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice (Standard)Price (Swap-free)
$6,000$59$65
$15,000$119$131
$25,000$199$219
$50,000$299$329
$100,000$519$571
$200,000$999$1,099

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 15% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase once you make a return of 5% on your funded account.

Add-ons for FundedNext’s Two-step Stellar Challenge

  1. 95% Lifetime Profit Split
  2. 150% Refund
  3. No Minimum Trading Days

Two-step Stellar Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Stellar Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with either an average return of 10% over the three-month period or a 2.5% return each month during the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 40% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Two-step Stellar Challenge for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $140,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $140,000 account increases to $180,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $180,000 account increases to $220,000.

And so on…

Two-step Stellar Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-step Stellar Challenge

FundedNext’s One-step Stellar Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $6,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Stellar Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice (Standard)Price (Swap-free)
$6,000$59$65
$15,000$119$131
$25,000$199$219
$50,000$299$329
$100,000$519$571
$200,000$999$1,099

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of two trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 5 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all the following payouts are also on a 5-day basis. Your profit split will be 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 15% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase once you make a return of 5% on your funded account.

Add-ons for FundedNext’s One-step Stellar Challenge

  1. 95% Lifetime Profit Split
  2. Weekly Payouts
  3. 150% Refund
  4. No Minimum Trading Days

One-step Stellar Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Stellar Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with either an average return of 10% over the three-month period or a 2.5% return each month during the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 40% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their One-step Stellar Challenge for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $140,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $140,000 account increases to $180,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $180,000 account increases to $220,000.

And so on…

One-step Stellar Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 2 days.

Stellar Lite Challenge

FundedNext’s Stellar Lite Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Stellar Lite Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice (Standard)Price (Swap-free)
$5,000$32$35
$10,000$59$65
$25,000$139$153
$50,000$229$252
$100,000$399$439

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 15% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase once you make a return of 5% on your funded account.

Add-ons for FundedNext’s Stellar Lite Challenge

  1. 95% Lifetime Profit Split
  2. No Minimum Trading Days
  3. Bi-weekly Payouts
  4. Increase Drawdown Limit by 2%

Stellar Lite Challenge Scaling Plan

The Stellar Lite Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with either an average return of 10% over the three-month period or a 2.5% return each month during the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 40% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Stellar Lite Challenge for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $140,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $140,000 account increases to $180,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $180,000 account increases to $220,000.

And so on…

Stellar Lite Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

What Makes FundedNext Different From Other Prop Firms?

FundedNext differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: two two-step evaluations and a one-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly withdrawals, a 15% profit share from demo phases, and being an affordable option (Stellar Lite Challenge).

FundedNext’s Two-step Stellar Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Stellar Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Stellar Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a 95% lifetime profit split add-on, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a 15% profit share from demo phases.

Example of comparison between FundedNext & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextBlue Guardian (Elite)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%85%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80%

FundedNext’s One-step Stellar Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Keep in mind that the One-Step Stellar Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Stellar Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a 95% lifetime profit split and weekly payout add-ons, and a 15% profit share from demo phases.

Example of comparison between FundedNext & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextFXIFY
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split90% up to 95%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split90% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading Days2 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split90% up to 95%80% up to 92.75%

FundedNext’s Stellar Lite Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Stellar Lite Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Stellar Lite Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a 95% lifetime profit split add-on, bi-weekly withdrawals, a 15% profit share from demo phases, and being an affordable option.

Example of comparison between FundedNext & TopTier Trader

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextTopTier Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextFunded Trading Plus (Premium)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between FundedNext & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesFundedNextSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Is Getting FundedNext Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Stellar Challenge is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Stellar Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 2 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 90% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Stellar Lite Challenge is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.

After considering all the factors, FundedNext is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations and a one-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

FundedNext is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 18th of March, 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with FundedNext and reaching funded status with the Two-step Stellar Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with FundedNext and reaching funded status with the One-step Stellar Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 5 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 5 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 90% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

And lastly, while working with FundedNext and reaching funded status with the Stellar Lite Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 30 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size on a monthly basis. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to FundedNext payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for FundedNext is their Discord channel, YouTube channel, and Instagram page, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does FundedNext Use?

FundedNext doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. Instead, they have developed their own FundedNext Server as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with FundedNext, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, Match-Trader, or cTrader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, FundedNext has developed its own FundedNext Server, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDAUD/USD
CAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHF
EUR/GBPEUR/HKDEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZD
EUR/SGDEUR/TRYEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDMNX/JPYNOK/JPY
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/SGDNZD/USDSGD/JPY
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNHUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUF
USD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGD
USD/TRYUSD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

UKO/USDUSO/USDXAG/USDXAU/USDXPT/USD

Indices

AUS200HK50EUSTX50FRA40GER30
NTH25SWI20NDX100SPX500UK100
US30JP225US2000VIX

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDBCH/USDBTC/USDDOG/USDETH/USD
LNK/USDLTC/USDXLM/USDXMR/USDXRP/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 3 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 3 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Account Spread

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 4FundedNext-Server123456FN2022Click here
MetaTrader 5FundedNext-Server123456@Fn2024*Click here
cTraderClick here
Match-TraderClick here

Education

FundedNext provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following five categories:

  • Market Analysis – Educational market recap articles
  • Important Announcement – Latest company news and updates
  • Forex Trading Guide – Educational trading guides
  • Traders’ Tale – Educational stories of traders from all across the globe
  • Trades Update – Latest trade and holiday updates

It is also worth mentioning that FundedNext is one of the companies that distinguishes itself by providing a free trial opportunity to traders all across the globe. This provides everyone with an opportunity to experience their trading conditions, as well as gain experience by testing their trading strategy within their demo environment.

Finally, FundedNext grants all clients entry to a professionally designed trader dashboard. This functionality enhances risk management by providing continuous access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates.

FundedNext Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

FundedNext has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, FundedNext has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.6 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 30,577 reviews. Notably, 84% of these reviews have awarded FundedNext the highest rating of 5 stars.

In the first comment, the client expresses an excellent experience with FundedNext, particularly appreciating their stellar challenge with a 15% profit split from the challenge phases. They highlight the quick and humble support staff, deeming FundedNext to be the best in the industry, considering all the features it provides.

FundedNext is hailed as one of the best proprietary trading firms, possessing unique qualities that set it apart from others in the industry. The client appreciates the seamless process of purchasing an account, efficient transactions, and the exemplary customer support team. They praise various exceptional qualities that make FundedNext stand out among all other prop firms. Gratitude is expressed for the commendable services provided by the firm.

Social Media Statistics

FundedNext can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook119,000 Followers & 78,000 Likes
Twitter126,700 Followers
Instagram216,000 Followers
YouTube48,800 Subscribers
Discord225,384 Members
Telegram46,218 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@fundednext.com
Phone+35725255160
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, Deutsch, Thai, Malaysian, Hindi, Polish, Italian, Arabic, French

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with FundedNext by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account size, account type, trading platform, swap preference, and add-ons.
  • Apply Promotional Code – Apply our refund code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 120% refund on all FundedNext account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, cryptocurrency, bank transfer, and Perfect Money payment methods.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from FundedNext, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, FundedNext is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the Two-step Stellar Challenge, Stellar Lite Challenge, which are two-step evaluations, and the One-step Stellar Challenge, which is one-step evaluation.

FundedNext’s Two-step Stellar Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Stellar Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundedNext’s One-step Stellar Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 90% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 2 calendar days during the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Stellar Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

FundedNext’s Stellar Lite Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Stellar Lite Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend FundedNext to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, an unlimited trading period, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a 15% profit share from demo phases. After considering everything FundedNext has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of FundedNext was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:20 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on FundedNext and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed FundedNext review by commenting below!

The post FundedNext Review (120% Refund Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/fundednext/feed/ 18
The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-5ers https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 19:10:00 +0000 http://export3.mercury.is/?post_type=casino&p=138 The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial […]

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

The5ers is both a proprietary trading firm and a growth program that offers distinctive career advancements to forex traders around the globe. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $250,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are The5ers?

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Five Percent Online Ltd that was incorporated in January 2016. They are located in Raanana, Israel, as well as in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO Saul Lokier. The5ers provides traders with the opportunity to choose between three account types, a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, while being partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

The5ers’ headquarters are located at 14 Haroshet St, Raanana, Israel.

Who is the CEO of The5ers?

Saul Lokier is the CEO of The5ers. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

The5ers provides its traders with three unique funding program options:

  • High Stakes
  • Hyper Growth
  • Bootcamp

High Stakes

The5ers’ High Stakes provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The High Stakes allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$39
$10,000$78
$20,000$165
$60,000$329
$100,000$545

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

High Stakes Scaling Plan

High Stakes also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your High Stakes account.

High Stakes Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.

Hyper Growth

The5ers’ Hyper Growth provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Hyper Growth allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$260
$10,000$450
$20,000$850

By purchasing Hyper Growth, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for stage 1. You must also respect the 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout is when you manage to hit your 10% profit target, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Hyper Growth Scaling Plan

Hyper Growth also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $40,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 7%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 11%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $80,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 10% profit target on your Hyper Growth account.

Hyper Growth Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for level one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. All account sizes have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.

Bootcamp

The5ers’ Bootcamp provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $100,000 up to $250,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can manage risk throughout the three-step period. The Bootcamp program allows you to trade with up to 1:10 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$100,000$95 ($205 Once Reaching Funded Status)
$250,000$225 ($350 Once Reaching Funded Status)

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing the 5% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum loss limit rule.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of $150. You must only respect the 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bootcamp Scaling Plan

The Bootcamp program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 5% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 5%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 2%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 3.5%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 5.5%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 5% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $125,000. Keep in mind that you are also able to withdraw your profits before reaching the 5% profit target on your Bootcamp account.

Bootcamp Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all three evaluation phases is 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Daily Pause – The maximum amount a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without triggering the daily pause. When the daily pause is hit, all open trades get closed, and the account remains disabled until the next trading day. Only funded accounts have a daily pause of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%. (4% Once Funded)
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum stop-loss requirement of 2% for each position.

What Makes The5ers Different From Other Prop Firms?

The5ers differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

The5ers’ High Stakes is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. High Stakes also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, High Stakes stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary75% up to 90%

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 3% daily pause and a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Hyper Growth also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Hyper Growth stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no evaluation phases, bi-weekly withdrawals after the initial 10% profit target, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between The5ers & City Traders Imperium

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersCity Traders Imperium
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The5ers & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss3% (Daily Pause)❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%50% up to 80%

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% with a 5% maximum loss rule during all three evaluation phases. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Bootcamp program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bootcamp program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, an affordable evaluation fee, a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days, bi-weekly withdrawals, and a profit split of up to 100%.

Example of comparison between The5ers & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%4%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)4%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between The5ers & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The5ers & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesThe5ersRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)5%
Maximum Loss5% (4% Once Funded)10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100%80% up to 90%

In conclusion, The5ers differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering three unique account types: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%.

Is Getting The5ers Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the High Stakes program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in each evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Hyper Growth program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bootcamp program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in each of the three evaluation phases) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum loss in evaluation phases, and 3% daily pause and 4% maximum loss once funded). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, The5ers is highly recommended since you have three unique funding programs to choose from: a two-step evaluation, an instant funding program, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

The5ers is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in January 2016. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with The5ers and reaching funded status with the High Stakes or Bootcamp programs, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Bootcamp account, while the High Stakes program will provide you with a generous profit split of 80% up to 100%.

However, while working with The5ers and purchasing the Hyper Growth program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to hit your 10% profit target. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you generated on your funded Hyper Growth account.

When it comes to The5ers payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for The5ers is their YouTube channel, where you can find numerous interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of successful Trader Interviews can be seen below.

Which Broker Does The5ers Use?

The5ers doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with The5ers, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, The5ers is partnered with a liquidity provider that grants them direct market access, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/USDGBP/USDUSD/JPYUSD/CADAUD/USDNZD/USD
USD/CHFAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXTI/USDXBR/USD

Indices

NAS100SP500UK100JPN225US30
DAX40

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 4 USD / LOT (XTI/USD & XBR/USD 0 USD / LOT)
INDICES 4 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5FivePercentOnline-Real2210229gdfsgdsf651Click here

Education

The5ers provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following five categories:

  • Advanced Forex Blog
  • Trader Interviews
  • Trading Room
  • Trading Psychology
  • Trading Strategy

Additionally, we can also find numerous other educational trading resources on their website, such as:

  • Asset Specifications – Updates
  • Trading Tools
  • Autochartist
  • Trading Ideas
  • Psychology Coaching
  • The5ers Classes
  • Videos
  • Forex Pivot Points
  • Trading Course
  • Tips to Succeed in The5ers Funded Trader Program
  • Economic Forex Calendar
  • Webinars & Live Events
  • Forex Scalping Workshop
  • Supply & Demand Workshop

Finally, The5ers provides all clients with access to a carefully designed trader dashboard. This feature improves risk management by offering continuous access to comprehensive statistics and goals, ensuring real-time updates throughout the day. This enhancement significantly contributes to an overall improved user experience.

The5ers Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

The5ers has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, The5ers have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.9 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 14,269 reviews. Notably, 93% of these reviews have awarded The5ers the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client appreciates The5ers as a longstanding company in the field, highlighting the delight in their longevity. They note the smallest spreads and smoother chart movements compared to other prop firms. The support from The5ers is commended as impeccable, with the commenter expressing confidence in reaching out for assistance and guidance and always receiving effective help.

In the second comment, the client praises The5ers for offering an opportunity for Forex traders to manage more substantial capital without risking their own funds. Despite a tight drawdown requirement, the commenter finds their profit-sharing model appealing, emphasizing the evident growth potential. They caution that, like all prop trading opportunities, it’s crucial to thoroughly comprehend the rules and conditions associated with The5ers.

Social Media Statistics

The5ers can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter57,500 Followers
Instagram85,400 Followers
YouTube56,800 Subscribers
TradingView5,700 Followers
Pinterest5,800 Followers
LinkedIn9,320 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailhelp@the5ers.com
Phone+1 (929) 955 5595
+44 (20) 8068 0793
Discord❌
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish, Arabic

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with The5ers through our affiliate link by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and payment currency.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from The5ers, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, The5ers is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between three funding programs: the High Stakes, which is a two-step evaluation, the Hyper Growth, which is an instant funding program, and the Bootcamp, which is a three-step evaluation.

The5ers’ High Stakes is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that High Stakes features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Hyper Growth is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for stage 1, with a 3% daily pause and 6% maximum loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Hyper Growth features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The5ers’ Bootcamp is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 50% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a 6% profit target in each of the three evaluation phases to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum loss rule to follow. However, once funded, you have a 3% daily pause and a 4% maximum loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bootcamp features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend The5ers to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (except High Stakes), affordable evaluation fees (Bootcamp), no evaluation phases (Hyper Growth), a first withdrawal after 14 calendar days (High Stakes & Bootcamp), bi-weekly withdrawals, affordable evaluation fee (Bootcamp), and a profit split of up to 100%. After considering everything The5ers has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of The5ers was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 10:45 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on The5ers and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed The5ers review by commenting below!

The post The5ers Review (10% Discount Link) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-5ers/feed/ 16
TopTier Trader Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/toptier-trader/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=toptier-trader https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/toptier-trader/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 18:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=2138 TopTier Trader motivates traders to excel in their careers, allowing them the flexibility to trade at their discretion and hold positions without any time constraints. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through […]

The post TopTier Trader Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

TopTier Trader motivates traders to excel in their careers, allowing them the flexibility to trade at their discretion and hold positions without any time constraints. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $300,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are TopTier Trader?

TopTier Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name TopTier Trader LLC that was incorporated on the 18th of October, 2021. They are located in Florida, United States, and are being managed by CEO Jamal Hollingsworth. TopTier Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between two account types, a two-step evaluation and a one-step evaluation, while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

TopTier Trader’s headquarters are located at 547 NW 28th St, Miami, FL 33127.

Who is the CEO of TopTier Trader?

Jamal Hollingsworth is the CEO of TopTier Trader. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

TopTier Trader provides its traders with two unique funding program options:

  • Two-phase Challenge
  • One-phase Challenge

Two-phase Challenge

TopTier Trader’s Two-phase Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $300,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-phase Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$129
$25,000$229
$50,000$335
$100,000$499
$200,000$975
$300,000$1,345

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of four trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for TopTier Trader’s Two-phase Challenge

  1. 14-Day Payout
  2. Double Leverage of 1:100
  3. 90% Profit Split
  4. Allowed Weekend Trading
  5. Allowed EAs
  6. Allowed News Trading
  7. 8% Hybrid Maximum Loss & Phase 1 Profit Target
  8. No Minimum Trading Days

Two-phase Challenge Scaling Plan

Two-phase Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size as well as a profit split increase of 5%. Profit split can be increased a maximum of three times, up to 95%. Keep in mind that you are able to manage $600,000 in total across multiple accounts, which can also be scaled all the way up to $2,000,000.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Two-phase Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets. (8% in phase 1 with Hybrid Add-on)
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%. (8% with Hybrid Add-on)
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 4 days. (No minimum trading day requirements with Add-on)
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. (Allowed with Add-on)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close. (Allowed with Add-on)
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your challenges in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeForexCommoditiesIndices (1 Contract)Cryptocurrencies
$5,0001 Lot0.3 Lots3 Lots0.1 Lots
$10,0002 Lots0.6 Lots6 Lots0.2 Lots
$25,0004 Lots1.6 Lots16 Lots0.5 Lots
$50,0008 Lots3 Lots30 Lots1 Lot
$100,00016 Lots6 Lots60 Lots2 Lots
$200,00032 Lots13 Lots130 Lots4 Lots
$300,00050 Lots19 Lots190 Lots6 Lots
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities. (Allowed with Add-on)
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 50% of your total profits. (Only applies once funded)

One-phase Challenge

TopTier Trader’s One-phase Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-phase Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:60.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$189
$50,000$289
$100,000$479

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all the following payouts are also on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for TopTier Trader’s One-phase Challenge

  1. Double Leverage of 1:60
  2. 90% Profit Split
  3. Allowed News Trading

One-phase Challenge Scaling Plan

One-phase Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 10% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size as well as a profit split increase of 5%. Profit split can be increased a maximum of three times, up to 95%. Keep in mind that you are able to manage $600,000 in total across multiple accounts, which can also be scaled all the way up to $2,000,000.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

One-phase Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. (Allowed with Add-on)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your challenges in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeForexCommoditiesIndices (1 Contract)Cryptocurrencies
$5,0001 Lot0.3 Lots3 Lots0.1 Lots
$10,0002 Lots0.6 Lots6 Lots0.2 Lots
$25,0004 Lots1.6 Lots16 Lots0.5 Lots
$50,0008 Lots3 Lots30 Lots1 Lot
$100,00016 Lots6 Lots60 Lots2 Lots
$200,00032 Lots13 Lots130 Lots4 Lots
$300,00050 Lots19 Lots190 Lots6 Lots
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 50% of your total profits. (Only applies once funded)

Levels

TopTier Trader’s Levels program introduces a milestone-based trading system focused on progression through accumulating pips rather than account balances. With no maximum drawdowns, time limits, swap fees, or weekend trading restrictions, traders enjoy full flexibility. Advancement requires banking target pips, with rewards increasing at each level, reaching up to $25,000 in payouts. This unique structure removes traditional constraints, allowing traders to refine their skills at their own pace while maximizing profits. Learn more about Levels.

What Makes TopTier Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

TopTier Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering two unique account types: a two-step evaluation and a one-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, multiple add-on features, a scaleable profit split, and bi-weekly payouts.

TopTier Trader’s Two-phase Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-phase Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-phase Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, multiple add-on features, a scaleable profit split, and bi-weekly payouts.

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

TopTier Trader’s One-phase Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The One-phase Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, multiple add-on features, a scaleable profit split, and bi-weekly payouts.

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & FunderPro

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderFunderPro
Profit Target10%14%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4% (5% Once Funded)
Maximum Loss6%7% (10% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderPipFarm (Trailing)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3%
Maximum Loss6%12% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between TopTier Trader & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesTopTier TraderGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%4%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 95%

In conclusion, TopTier Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering two unique account types: a two-step evaluation and a one-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, multiple add-on features, a scaleable profit split, and bi-weekly payouts.

Is Getting TopTier Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-phase Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 4 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Challenge is realistic primarily due to its slightly above-average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.

After considering all the factors, TopTier Trader is highly recommended since you have a single funding program to choose from, which features realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

TopTier Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 18th of October, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with TopTier Trader and reaching funded status with the Two-phase Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 30 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with TopTier Trader and reaching funded status with the One-phase Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to TopTier Trader payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof of TopTier Trader is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does TopTier Trader Use?

TopTier Trader steers clear of working with conventional broker brands. Instead, they have formed a strategic partnership with a top-tier liquidity provider, ensuring access to the most accurate simulated real-market trading conditions available.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with TopTier Trader, they allow you to trade on TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, TopTier Trader is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

EUR/CADCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/HUFUSD/BRL
USD/CNHUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/TRYUSD/ZAREUR/CZK
EUR/PLNEUR/ZARGBP/ZAREUR/TRY

Commodities

XAU/USDXAU/EURXAG/USDWTIBRENT
NGASCOPPERXPT/USDCORNSOYBEANS
WHEAT

Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40UK100
JPN225NAS100SPX500US30CHINA50
HK50SPAIN35VIXUS2000TAIEX

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 7 USD / LOT (Only Metals)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
TradeLockerClick here

Education

TopTier Trader provides its community with a detailed Insights section with educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • FX Summit
  • Market Watch
  • Meet Ups
  • Traders
  • Trading Tips
  • Updates

TopTier Trader also offers a comprehensive learning platform, TopTier Academy, designed to support traders at all levels. It provides structured courses, live webinars, and expert guidance across various aspects of trading, from beginner concepts to advanced strategies. The Academy aims to empower traders with the skills and knowledge needed to succeed in the dynamic world of trading.

Additionally, TopTier Trader has developed a Trader Quiz, which is a tool designed to help traders assess their skill level and knowledge of trading. It offers a series of questions to evaluate a trader’s understanding of different concepts, helping individuals identify areas of strength and areas for improvement. This quiz serves as a valuable resource for both new and experienced traders to gauge their readiness and knowledge, offering personalized insights into their trading abilities.

Lastly, TopTier Trader offers all clients access to a well-structured dashboard, which simplifies the process of risk management by providing a comprehensive overview of key metrics and performance indicators. This intuitive tool helps traders track their progress, set and monitor specific goals, and make informed decisions based on detailed statistical objectives, ultimately enhancing their overall trading experience.

TopTier Trader Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

TopTier Trader has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, TopTier Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 4,104 reviews. Notably, 85% of these reviews have awarded TopTier Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that TopTier Trader’s customer service is praised for its efficiency in resolving issues and providing clear answers to questions. The client appreciates the accessibility of support, feeling reassured that assistance is only a message away and never feeling stuck with their concerns.

The overall experience with TopTier Trader was smooth and easy, with gratitude expressed for promptly answering all questions. The client acknowledges the professionalism and quick response, contrasting it positively with their experiences with other prop firms. They anticipate having more questions in the future but are satisfied with the current prompt and professional assistance.

Social Media Statistics

TopTier Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram89,300 Followers
Discord42,063 Members
YouTube18,900 Subscribers
Twitter17,400 Followers
Facebook13,000 Members & 4,900 Likes
TikTok1,309 Followers & 6,272 Likes
Telegram7,308 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@toptiertrader.com
Phone888-396-8550
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, French, German, Portuguese, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with TopTier Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and add-ons.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, cryptocurrency, or PayPal payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 20% discount on all TopTier Trader account types.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from TopTier Trader, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, TopTier Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between two funding programs: the Two-phase Challenge, which is a two-step evaluation, and the One-phase Challenge, which is a one-step evaluation.

TopTier Trader’s TopTier Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 4 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-phase Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

TopTier Trader’s One-phase Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-phase Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend TopTier Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, multiple add-on features, a scaleable profit split, and bi-weekly payouts. After considering everything TopTier Trader offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of TopTier Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:11 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on TopTier Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed TopTier Trader review by commenting below!

The post TopTier Trader Review (20% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/toptier-trader/feed/ 7
Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=alpha-capital-group https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/#comments Wed, 01 Sep 2021 05:50:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=14580 Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 […]

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Alpha Capital Group offers traders a comprehensive platform featuring educational videos, market insights, mentoring, trading strategies, and custom-built technology. This support system aims to guide traders toward obtaining funding and eventually becoming proprietary traders within the group. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive 80% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, and indices.

Who are Alpha Capital Group?

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Alpha Capital Group Limited that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They are located in London, UK, and are being managed by CEO George Kohler. Alpha Capital Group provide traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation while developing their own ACG Markets brokerage.

Their headquarters are located at 10 Lower Thames Street, Billingsgate, London, England, EC3R 6AF.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Alpha Capital Group provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Alpha Pro Challenge
  • Alpha Swing Challenge
  • Alpha One-step Challenge
  • Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Pro Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 2-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news. (Only on funded accounts)
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Swing Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Alpha Swing Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$70
$10,000$147
$25,000$247
$50,000$357
$100,000$577
$200,000$1,097

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Swing Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Swing Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0001.25 Lots
$10,0002.5 Lots
$25,0005 Lots
$50,00010 Lots
$100,00020 Lots
$200,00040 Lots
$300,00060 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha One-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$50
$10,000$97
$25,000$197
$50,000$297
$100,000$497
$200,000$997

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a minimum withdrawal requirement of 2%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

Alpha Three-step Challenge

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a three-step evaluation period. The Alpha One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$67
$25,000$157
$50,000$247
$100,000$397
$200,000$697

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account. You must also respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Payouts on your funded account can be requested on-demand or bi-weekly, depending on the conditions met. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will be 80% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. You increase your balance by generating a 10% or more profit and requesting a profit split at the end of each trading period. Alpha Capital Group will send you an 80% profit split based on the profit you managed to generate on your funded account and add back the balance before the withdrawal to increase your account size accordingly.

Alpha Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase one is 8%. The profit target for the Evaluation phase two and three is 4%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 3 days.
  • No News Trading – Trading is not permitted during high-impact news releases. This implies that executing new trades or closing existing trades on the specified instrument is prohibited within the 5-minute period both before and after the announcement of particular news.
  • Lot Size Limit – Limitation of lot sizes for specific trading instruments. These are, in most cases, set based on the initial account balance of your trading account. Please refer to the following lot size limitations for your funded account in the spreadsheet below.
Account SizeLot Size Limitation (Once Funded)
$5,0002.5 Lots
$10,0005 Lots
$25,00010 Lots
$50,00020 Lots
$100,00040 Lots
$200,00080 Lots
$300,000120 Lots
  • Average Trade Duration – Traders are required to hold their trades before closing them for an average duration of 2 minutes.

What Makes Alpha Capital Group Different From Other Prop Firms?

Alpha Capital Group differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Alpha Swing Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Swing Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & The5%ers

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupThe5%ers
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Alpha One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80%50% up to 80%

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in all evaluation phase. The Alpha Three-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Alpha Three-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no commission fees, payout on-demand option, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%5%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

Example of comparison between Alpha Capital Group & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesAlpha Capital GroupE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80%80%

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Is Getting Alpha Capital Group Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Swing Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.
  • Receiving capital from the Alpha Three-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one, 4% phase two, and 4% in phase three) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80%.

After considering all the factors, Alpha Capital Group is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, and a three-step evaluation which both feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Alpha Capital Group is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 2nd of November, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha Pro Challenge, Alpha Swing Challenge, or Alpha Three-step Challenge you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days or on-demand. On-demand payouts require at least 2% of total gross profits in your account balance and compliance with the 40% Best Day Rule, which means no single trading day can contribute more than 40% of your total profits. Bi-weekly payouts are available every two weeks, with a minimum withdrawal of $100 and at least 5 trading days completed within the period. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Alpha Capital Group and reaching funded status with the Alpha One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on-demand with a minimum consistency score of 50% and a minimum profit of 2%. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts on an on-demand basis if the above requirements are met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Alpha Capital Group payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Alpha Capital Group is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Alpha Capital Group Use?

Alpha Capital Group doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. Instead, they have developed their own ACG Markets broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Alpha Capital Group, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5, cTrader, or DXtrade.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Alpha Capital Group has developed ACG Markets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, and indices with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHF
GBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/SGDGBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHF
NZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/HKDUSD/JPY
USD/SGD

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDUKOilUSOil

Indices

EUSTX50GER30HK50JPN225NAS100
UK100US30US500

Trading Fees

Trading commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX0 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES0 USD / LOT
INDICES0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5ACGMarkets-Live1189526ForexpropreviewsClick here
cTraderClick here
DXtradeClick here

Education

Alpha Capital Group provides its community with a detailed Media section with educational content, such as the following three categories:

  • Market Preview
  • Weekly Recaps
  • Market Roundup

Additionally, we can also find two educational trading resources on their website:

They are also one of the few prop firms that have an option of a free trial before starting with the evaluation challenge so you can prepare yourself and reduce the chances of errors happening when you do decide to purchase the challenge.

Finally, Alpha Capital Group grants all clients access to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard, simplifying risk management with continuous access to detailed statistics and objectives. This ensures real-time updates every minute, enhancing the overall user experience.

Alpha Capital Group Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

Alpha Capital Group has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Alpha Capital Group have a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.5 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 10,116 reviews. Notably, 83% of these reviews have awarded Alpha Capital Group the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that Alpha Capital Group is praised for offering one of the best trading conditions in the industry, featuring no commissions and minimal or no slippage. Regular and even substantial payouts are being processed, and the accessibility of prop owners, particularly through Discord, phone calls, and WhatsApp. The commenter emphasizes the unmatched transparency of Alpha Capital Group, expressing confidence as they haven’t encountered any unresolved issues.

Among several prop firms considered, Alpha Capital Group stands out as the best for this client. They highlight the benefits of low spreads and no commission, ensuring a higher retention of earned funds upon getting funded. The dashboard is praised for its rich data and analytics, aiding in trading decisions.

Social Media Statistics

Alpha Capital Group can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter63,000 Followers
YouTube25,200 Subscribers
Discord106,049 Members
Instagram70,000 Followers

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailinfo@alphacapitalgroup.uk
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Alpha Capital Group by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all Alpha Capital Group account sizes.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from Alpha Capital Group, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Alpha Capital Group is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between Four funding programs: Alpha Pro Challenge and Alpha Swing Challenge, which are both two-step programs, Alpha One-step Challenge, which is a one-step program, and Alpha Three-step Challenge, which is a three-step program.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Swing Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Swing Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

Alpha Capital Group’s Alpha Three-step Challenge is an industry-standard three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, 4% in phase two and 4% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Alpha Three-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Alpha Capital Group to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (on Alpha One-step Evaluation), no commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts. After considering everything Alpha Capital Group has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of Alpha Capital Group was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:18 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Alpha Capital Group and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Alpha Capital Group review by commenting below!

The post Alpha Capital Group Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/alpha-capital-group/feed/ 3
City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=city-traders-imperium https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/#comments Thu, 10 Jun 2021 16:51:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=1506 City Traders Imperium encourages aspiring traders to achieve financial freedom, no matter their background or where they come from. They bring over four decades of collective experience, providing traders around the globe with unique solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive […]

The post City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

City Traders Imperium encourages aspiring traders to achieve financial freedom, no matter their background or where they come from. They bring over four decades of collective experience, providing traders around the globe with unique solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $100,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are City Traders Imperium?

City Traders Imperium is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name CTI FZCO that was incorporated on the 13th of July, 2018. They are located in Dubai, United Arab Emirates, and are being managed by co-founders Daniel Martin and Martin Najat. City Traders Imperium provides traders with the opportunity to choose between four account types, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs, while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

City Traders Imperium headquarters are located at Dubai Silicon Oasis, DDP, Building A2, Dubai, United Arab Emirates.

Who is the CEO of City Traders Imperium?

Daniel Martin and Martin Najat are co-founders of City Traders Imperium.

Daniel Martin is one of the co-founders of City Traders Imperium, with more than 20 years of trading experience. He has helped a wide variety of traders to become consistently profitable in their trading by focusing on the development of their trading psychology and methodology. He decided that after years of success and the achievement of financial freedom, he was not done with the markets. Instead of retiring, he committed to a new life goal of creating a global army of profitable traders.

Martin Najat, on the other hand, is the second co-founder of City Traders Imperium. He has seen major success as a Smart Money Concepts trader and has become a full-time trader after improving his trading psychology with the help of Daniel Martin.

His vision while founding City Traders Imperium was to help undercapitalized traders who lacked the amount of capital and help them change their lives. While he was working as an investment analyst in London, he soon realized that he wanted to engage in a lot more than just trading. With that, he is currently running City Traders Imperium and helping build a strong team of profitable traders.

Anyone interested in following Martin Najat can do so by following his Instagram and LinkedIn. This way, you will be able to see more of his posts and what he’s up to on a daily basis.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

City Traders Imperium provides its traders with four unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Instant Funding
  • Instant Funding Pro

Two-step Challenge

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$39
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$329
$100,000$519

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The Two-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000
Phase 1$3,750$7,500$15,000$37,500$75,000$112,500
Phase 2$5,000$10,000$20,000$50,000$100,000$125,000
Phase 3$7,500$15,000$25,000$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 4$10,000$20,000$37,500$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 5$15,000$25,000$50,000$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 6$20,000$37,500$75,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 7$25,000$50,000$100,000$150,000$200,000
Phase 8$37,500$75,000$112,500$175,000
Phase 9$50,000$100,000$125,000$200,000
Phase 10$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 11$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 12$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 13$125,000$175,000
Phase 14$150,000$200,000
Phase 15$175,000
Phase 16$200,000

Example:

The profit target for the $100,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.

One-step Challenge

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$29
$5,000$49
$10,000$79
$25,000$149
$50,000$249
$100,000$449

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum trailing loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum trailing loss rule. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

The One-step Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$25,000$50,000$100,000
Phase 1$3,750$7,500$15,000$37,500$75,000$112,500
Phase 2$5,000$10,000$20,000$50,000$100,000$125,000
Phase 3$7,500$15,000$25,000$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 4$10,000$20,000$37,500$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 5$15,000$25,000$50,000$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 6$20,000$37,500$75,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 7$25,000$50,000$100,000$150,000$200,000
Phase 8$37,500$75,000$112,500$175,000
Phase 9$50,000$100,000$125,000$200,000
Phase 10$75,000$112,500$150,000
Phase 11$100,000$125,000$175,000
Phase 12$112,500$150,000$200,000
Phase 13$125,000$175,000
Phase 14$150,000$200,000
Phase 15$175,000
Phase 16$200,000

Example:

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 5%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

Instant Funding

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$69
$5,000$129
$10,000$249
$20,000$449
$40,000$849
$80,000$1,499

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must only respect the 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout is when you manage to hit your 10% profit target, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Instant Funding Scaling Plan

The Instant Funding also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$2,500$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000
Phase 1$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000
Phase 2$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
Phase 3$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
Phase 4$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000
Phase 5$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 6$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 7$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 8$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 9$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 10$2,000,000

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

Instant Funding Pro

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $80,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Instant Funding Pro allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$299
$10,000$599
$20,000$1,199
$40,000$2,399
$80,000$4,799

By purchasing the Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must only respect the 6% maximum loss rule. Your first payout on your funded account is on-demand, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 50% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Instant Funding Pro Scaling Plan

The Instant Funding Pro also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, which depends on the funded account scaling phase, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Phase$5,000$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000
Phase 1$10,000$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000
Phase 2$20,000$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000
Phase 3$40,000$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000
Phase 4$80,000$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000
Phase 5$160,000$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 6$320,000$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 7$640,000$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 8$1,000,000$2,000,000
Phase 9$2,000,000
Phase 10

The profit target for the $10,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since you reached the required 10% profit target.

Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position.

What Makes City Traders Imperium Different From Other Prop Firms?

City Traders Imperium differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering four unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs.

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Two-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, and a balance-based drawdown.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesCTIFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesCTIFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesCTIE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80%

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8%, with a 5% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days during the evaluation phase. The One-step Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, and a balance-based drawdown.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target8%12%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumBlue Guardian
Profit Target8%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss5% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%+ Monthly Salary85%

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to a unique instant funding program.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌6%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary50% up to 80%

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 6% maximum loss rule. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Instant Funding Pro also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Instant Funding Pro stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to a unique instant funding program.

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFXIFY
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌8%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary80% (90% With Add-on)

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumFunding Pips
Profit Target❌❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%
Maximum Loss6%5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary95% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between City Traders Imperium & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesCity Traders ImperiumGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target❌❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss6%8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split50% up to 100% + Monthly Salary65% up to 95%

In conclusion, City Traders Imperium differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering four unique account types: a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs.

Is Getting City Traders Imperium Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 8% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (5% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Instant Funding Pro is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with the average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 50% up to 100%.

After considering all the factors, City Traders Imperium is highly recommended since you have four unique funding programs to choose from, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and two instant funding programs, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

City Traders Imperium is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 13th of July, 2018. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with the Two-step Challenge and One-step Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first withdrawal on-demand on your funded account. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 30 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to hit your 10% profit target. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Instant Funding account.

And lastly, while working with City Traders Imperium and reaching funded status with Instant Funding Pro, you will be eligible to receive your first withdrawal on-demand on your funded account. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 50% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Instant Funding Pro account.

When it comes to City Traders Imperium payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for City Traders Imperium is their Discord channel and YouTube channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates and interviews of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does City Traders Imperium Use?

City Traders Imperium doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with City Traders Imperium, they allow you to trade on MetaTrader 5 and Match-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, City Traders Imperium is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the funding program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/USDGBP/USDUSD/JPYUSD/CADAUD/USDNZD/USD
USD/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/AUDEUR/CHF
EUR/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/AUDGBP/NZDGBP/CAD
CAD/CHFCAD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/JPYAUD/CHFAUD/NZD
CHF/JPYNZD/JPYNZD/CADNZD/CHF

Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDXTI/USD

Indices

US30USTECUS500UK100DE40
AUS200F40JP225STOXX50CHC50
ES35HKCHKDN25SWI20RUS2000

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDADA/USDETH/USDLTC/USD
SOL/USDXRP/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX5 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES5 USD / LOT
INDICES0.5 USD / LOT
CRYPTO0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5CBT-Limited3220test3220Click here
Match-TraderClick here

Education

City Traders Imperium provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following four categories:

  • Funding
  • Technical Analysis
  • Risk Management
  • Knowledge Base

Additionally, City Traders Imperium also provides traders access to the CTI Academy, which includes numerous educational courses and other educational resources useful for traders of all experience levels.

City Traders Imperium stands out as an exclusive proprietary trading firm that provides a complimentary trial option. This enables traders to familiarize themselves with the platform’s trading conditions, reducing the chance of errors when they eventually choose from the four available funding programs.

Finally, City Traders Imperium provides its clients with exclusive entry to a meticulously crafted trader dashboard. This feature elevates risk management by offering continuous access to comprehensive statistics and objectives.

Trustpilot Feedback

City Traders Imperium has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, City Traders Imperium has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.4 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,304 reviews. Notably, 86% of these reviews have awarded City Traders Imperium the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client extensively researched various funded prop firms and ultimately chose to sign up with City Traders Imperium. They highlight the excellent services and support received even before signing up. The Instant Funding model is particularly praised as one of the best in the industry and aligns well with their circumstances. With five years of trading experience, they express confidence that City Traders Imperium is a perfect fit for their needs.

The client recently secured funding with City Traders Imperium and praises them as one of the top prop firms in the industry. They highlight the diverse challenges offered by City Traders Imperium, accommodating various trading styles and risk appetites. No issues have been encountered so far, and any concerns are promptly addressed with reasonable and efficient resolution. The commenter strongly recommends City Traders Imperium based on their positive experience.

Social Media Statistics

City Traders Imperium can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

YouTube12,500 Subscribers
Facebook3,900 Followers
Twitter19,200 Followers
Instagram20,300 Followers
TikTok3,495 Followers & 612 Likes
Discord20,170 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@citytradersimperium.com
Phone❌
DiscordDiscord Link
Telegram❌
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with City Traders Imperium by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Account Size – Choose your account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method & Apply Discount Code – Choose between a credit/debit card and a cryptocurrency payment method and apply our discount code CTI10% and enjoy a 10% discount. Please note that One-step Challenge and No-Evaluation Program have no available discounts.

Conclusion

In conclusion, City Traders Imperium is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between four funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, which is a two-step evaluation, the One-step Challenge, which is a one-step evaluation, and Instant Funding and Instant FUunding Pro, which are instant funding programs.

City Traders Imperium’s Two-step Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s One-step Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 8% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum trailing loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 calendar days in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 50% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase 1, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

City Traders Imperium’s Instant Funding Pro is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Instant Funding Pro features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend City Traders Imperium to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, an opportunity to qualify for a monthly salary, a balance-based drawdown, and access to two unique instant funding programs. After considering everything City Traders Imperium offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of City Traders Imperium was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:20 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on City Traders Imperium and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed City Traders Imperium review by commenting below!

The post City Traders Imperium Review (10% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/city-traders-imperium/feed/ 23
Lux Trading Firm Review (5% discount code: forexpropreviews) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/lux-trading-firm/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=lux-trading-firm https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/lux-trading-firm/#comments Sat, 01 May 2021 08:41:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=1432 Lux Trading Firm encourages traders by enabling them to earn higher profits by managing significant amounts of capital. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $1,000,000 and receive 75% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, […]

The post Lux Trading Firm Review (5% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Lux Trading Firm encourages traders by enabling them to earn higher profits by managing significant amounts of capital. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $1,000,000 and receive 75% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and futures.

Who are Lux Trading Firm?

Lux Trading Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Lux Trading Firm Ltd that was incorporated on the 27th of January 2021. They are located in London, UK, as well as in Dubai, United Arab Emirates. Lux Trading Firm provides traders with the opportunity to choose between two account types, a one-step evaluation, and a two-step evaluation while developing their own The Lux Broker brokerage.

Lux Trading Firm’s headquarters are located at 128 City Road, London EC1V 2NX, United Kingdom.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Lux Trading Firm provides its traders with two unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Evaluation
  • One-step Evaluation

Two-step Evaluation

Lux Trading Firm’s Two-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $50,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Two-step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$50,000£299
$200,000£599

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 6% maximum trailing loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 29 trading days (15 calendar days for swing traders) in order to proceed to phase two. After completing the first evaluation phase, you are also eligible for a 50% refund of your initial one-time fee.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 5% maximum trailing loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 4% profit target without breaching the maximum trailing loss limit rule. After completing the second evaluation phase, you are also eligible for a second 50% refund of your initial one-time fee.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 6% maximum trailing loss rule. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Two-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

The Two-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Scaling Plan – $50,000 Account
Scaling Plan – $200,000 Account

Two-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 4%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Evaluation phase one has a 29 minimum trading day requirement (15 calendar days for swing traders), while evaluation phase two has no minimum trading day requirements.
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position. The minimum stop-loss distance for each trading instrument is displayed within the following Document.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. You should be consistent with your risk size per trade while trading in the evaluation stage. In cases of multiple trades, the total risk must also be the same.

One-step Evaluation

Lux Trading Firm’s One-step Evaluation provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes of $1,000,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Evaluation allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000,000£1,499

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 15% while not surpassing their 6% maximum trailing loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 29 trading days (15 calendar days for swing traders) in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 6% maximum trailing loss rule. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted monthly. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

One-step Evaluation Scaling Plan

The One-step Evaluation also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Scaling Plan – $1,000,000 Account

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 15%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 29 minimum trading day requirement (15 calendar days for swing traders).
  • Stop-loss Required – Before initiating a trade, it is mandatory for the trader to place a stop-loss on each position. The minimum stop-loss distance for each trading instrument is displayed within the following Document.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. You should be consistent with your risk size per trade while trading in the evaluation stage. In cases of multiple trades, the total risk must also be the same.

What Makes Lux Trading Firm Different From Other Prop Firms?

Lux Trading Firm differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering two unique account types: a one-step evaluation and a two-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Phase two of Two-step Evaluation), no maximum daily drawdown rule, a scaling plan up to $10,000,000, and account sizes up to $1,000,000 (One-step Evaluation).

Lux Trading Firm’s Two-step Evaluation is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 6% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 29 trading days (15 calendar days for swing traders) in phase one, while there are no minimum trading day requirements in phase two. The Two-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Two-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements in phase two, no maximum daily drawdown rule, and a scaling plan up to $10,000,000.

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysPhase One: 29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
Phase Two: No Minimum Trading Days
3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmFundedNext (Evaluation)
Phase 1 Profit Target6%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss❌5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)10%
Minimum Trading DaysPhase One: 29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
Phase Two: No Minimum Trading Days
5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: 4 Weeks
Phase 2: 8 Weeks
Profit Split75%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%4%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)8% (Scaleable to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysPhase One: 29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
Phase Two: No Minimum Trading Days
No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75%80%

Lux Trading Firm’s One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 15%, with a 6% maximum trailing loss rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 29 trading days (15 calendar days for swing traders) during the evaluation phase. The One-step Evaluation also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-step Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no maximum daily drawdown rule, a scaling plan up to $10,000,000, and account sizes up to $1,000,000.

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmPipFarm (Trailing)
Profit Target15%12%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)12% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmMyFundedFX
Profit Target15%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading Days29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%80% up to 92.75%

Example of comparison between Lux Trading Firm & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesLux Trading FirmThe Funded Trader
Profit Target15%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (4% with Add-on)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)
Minimum Trading Days29 Calendar Days
(Swing Traders: 15 Calendar Days)
No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%80% up to 90%

In conclusion, Lux Trading Firm differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering two unique account types: a one-step evaluation and a two-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Phase two of Two-step Evaluation), no maximum daily drawdown rule, a scaling plan up to $10,000,000, and account sizes up to $1,000,000 (One-step Evaluation).

Is Getting Lux Trading Firm Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Two-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (6% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 29 calendar days (15 calendar days for swing traders) in phase one and no minimum trading day requirements in phase two. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-step Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its slightly above-average profit target of 15% coupled with the average maximum loss rule (6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 29 calendar days (15 calendar days for swing traders). Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.

After considering all the factors, Lux Trading Firm is highly recommended since you have two unique funding programs to choose from, a one-step evaluation and a two-step evaluation, which both feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Lux Trading Firm is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 27th of January, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Lux Trading Firm and reaching funded status with the Two-step or One-step Evaluation, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 30 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size every 30 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

When it comes to Lux Trading Firm payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Lux Trading Firm is their YouTube channel, where you can find numerous trader interviews of their most successful traders.

Examples of successful Trader Interviews can be seen below.

Which Broker Does Lux Trading Firm Use?

Lux Trading Firm doesn’t trade with any of the common broker brands. Instead, they have developed their own The Lux Broker.

As for trading platforms, while working with Lux Trading Firm, they allow you to trade on The Lux Trader or Match-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Lux Trading Firm has developed The Lux Broker, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and futures, with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NOKAUD/NZDAUD/PLN
AUD/SEKAUD/SGDAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPYCHF/HUF
CHF/JPYCHF/NOKCHF/PLNCHF/SEKCHF/SGDEUR/AUD
EUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZKEUR/DKKEUR/GBPEUR/HKD
EUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/MXNEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLN
EUR/SEKEUR/SGDEZR/TRYEUR/USDEUR/ZARGBP/AUD
GBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/DKKGBP/HUFGBP/JPYGBP/MXN
GBP/NOKGBP/NZDGBP/PLNGBP/SEKGBP/SGDGBP/TRY
GBP/USDGBP/ZARHKD/JPYNOK/JPYNOK/SEKNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/HUFNZD/JPYNZD/SGDNZD/USDPLN/JPY
SEK/JPYSGD/JPYUSD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/CNHUSD/CZK
USD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUFUSD/ILSUSD/JPYUSD/MXN
USD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/RUBUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/THB
USD/TRYUSD/ZARZAR/JPY

Commodities

UKOilUSOilNGASXAG/AUDXAG/EUR
XAG/USDXAL/USDXAU/AUDXAU/EURXAU/USD
XPD/USDXPT/USD

Indices

AUS200CH50US30SPA35STOXX50
FR40GER40HKDJPN225NE25
US100RUS2000US500SWI20UK100

As mentioned above, Lux Trading Firm also allows you to trade a wide range of stocks and futures. To view the full list, please refer to the List of All Symbols.

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREXCommission Fees Vary
COMMODITIESCommission Fees Vary
INDICESCommission Fees Vary
STOCKSCommission Fees Vary
FUTURESCommission Fees Vary

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-TraderClick here

Education

Lux Trading Firm provides its community with a detailed Blog with valuable educational articles.

Lux Trading Firm also offers a free trial option to its community, allowing members to familiarize themselves with its platform and trading rules while experiencing what it’s like to trade with the company.

Lastly, Lux Trading Firm also offers a modern trading dashboard to keep track of your trading progress, which can be extremely beneficial during evaluation stages as well as once you are managing a funded account.

Trustpilot Feedback

Lux Trading Firm has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Lux Trading Firm has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 662 reviews. Notably, 78% of these reviews have awarded Lux Trading Firm the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows the client praising Lux Trading Firm’s MT5 platform as a bridge between traditional and futuristic trading. They express the platform’s richness with tools and cryptocurrencies, creating a unique experience that feels both rooted in the past and forward-looking toward the future.

The client shares a positive experience with Lux Trading Firm, highlighting their successful cash-out process and seamless payout. Despite initial nerves, the Lux team made the experience easy, and the funds were received faster than expected. They recommend Lux Trading Firm as a reliable platform that delivers on payouts.

Social Media Statistics

Lux Trading Firm can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook4,600 Followers & 3,400 Likes
Twitter2.493 Followers
Instagram3,567 Followers
YouTube6,860 Subscribers
Discord4,711 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsales@luxtradingfirm.com
tech-support@luxtradingfirm.com
trading@luxtradingfirm.com
PhoneMarketing & Sales: +44 (0)20 7167 8107
Management: +382 325 40312
Administration: +971 4 4070582
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Lux Trading Firm by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Lux Trading Firm is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between two funding programs: the Two-step Evaluation, which is a two-step evaluation, and the One-step Evaluation, which is a one-step evaluation.

Lux Trading Firm’s Two-step Evaluation is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one and 4% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 6% maximum trailing loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 29 calendar days (15 calendar days for swing traders) in phase one, and no minimum trading day requirements in phase two. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Two-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, Lux Trading Firm’s One-step Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 15% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 6% maximum trailing loss rule to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 29 calendar days (15 calendar days for swing traders). Finally, it’s essential to note that the One-step Evaluation features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Lux Trading Firm to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements (Phase two of Two-step Evaluation), a scaling plan up to $10,000,000, and account sizes up to $1,000,000 (One-step Evaluation). After considering everything Lux Trading Firm has to offer to traders worldwide, they can be considered an excellent choice for anyone who has a well-developed trading strategy and is looking to acquire profits slowly on a consistent basis.

Our detailed review of Lux Trading Firm was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:05 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Lux Trading Firm and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Lux Trading Firm review by commenting below!

The post Lux Trading Firm Review (5% discount code: forexpropreviews) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/lux-trading-firm/feed/ 13
Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=goat-funded-trader https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/#respond Mon, 01 Mar 2021 06:36:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=25466 Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that is committed to a trader's success while also offering them an exceptional trading experience.

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Goat Funded Trader is dedicated to ensuring the success of traders by providing an outstanding 24/7 trading experience. The commitment includes responsive customer service, refundable fees, achievable profit targets, top-notch trading tools, competitive commissions, and tight spreads. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Goat Funded Trader?

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Wishes Tower International SL, which was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They are located in the Canary Islands, Spain, and are being managed by CEO Edoardo Dalla Torre. Goat Funded Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between seven account types, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three step evaluations and two instant funding program while being partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

Goat Funded Trader’s headquarters are located in the Canary Islands, Spain.

Who is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader?

Edoardo Dalla Torre is the CEO of Goat Funded Trader. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Goat Funded Trader provides its traders with seven unique funding program options:

  • Goat Challenge
  • Standard Challenge
  • Pro Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge
  • Standard Instant Funding Program
  • Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $150,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Goat Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$30
$8,000$48
$15,000$88
$25,000$138
$50,000$238
$100,000$398
$150,000$598

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is on-demand or after 30 calendar days after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a monthly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Goat Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Goat Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Standard Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Standard Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$44
$8,000$84
$15,000$154
$25,000$194
$50,000$294
$100,000$524
$200,000$974

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on demand

Standard Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Standard Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Pro Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$55
$8,000$89
$15,000$149
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$997

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 4% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Pro Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 12%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

One-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $15,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$15,000$170
$25,000$230
$50,000$339
$100,000$590
$200,000$1,050

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s One-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

One-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

One-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase is set at 10%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.

Three-step Challenge

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:100 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$65
$15,000$85
$25,000$145
$50,000$225
$100,000$365
$200,000$665

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of three trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of 3 trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a 3% profit requirement only for your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum loss rules and daily profit cap of $3,000. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position and after you manage to generate a 3% profit on your funded account and met requirement of 3 minimum trading days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 14 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split
  2. First payout on-demand

Three-step Challenge Scaling Plan

Coming soon…

Three-step Evaluation Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for all Phase is set at 6%.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – To progress to the next stage or request a payout, traders must complete at least 3 separate trading days. ​For a day to count as a valid trading day, the trader must generate a minimum net profit of 0.5% of the initial account balance.
  • Daily Profit Cap – traders can earn a max of $3,000 per trading day (excess profits are deducted but not considered a violation).

Standard Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $50,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$98
$5,000$198
$10,000$398
$20,000$798
$50,000$1,898

By purchasing Standard Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is on the 5th, 15th, and 25th day of the month, while all other withdrawals can be submitted every 10 days. Your profit split will be 65% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Goat Funded Trader’s Three-step Challenge

  1. 100% Profit Split

Standard Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Standard Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Standard Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.

Goat Instant Funding Program

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Goat Instant Funding Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$107
$10,000$147
$15,000$217
$25,000$307
$50,000$467
$100,000$767

By purchasing Goat Instant Funding Program, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily, 6% maximum trailing loss rules and have at least 5 trading days before requesting a reward. You also have met the requirement of Consistency Rule. Your first payout is after 14 calendar days, while all other withdrawals can be submitted on a bi-weekly basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Scaling Plan

Goat Instant Funding Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size up to three times. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits but will instead receive a 50% profit split based on the 10% generated profit as well as a double-up balance increase. It is worth noting that you can scale your account a maximum of three times, meaning that a $50,000 Instant Funding account can be scaled up to $400,000.

Example:

After generating a profit of 10% on your $50,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $100,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $100,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $200,000 account.

After generating a profit of 10% on your $200,000 account, you can request to scale, which will result in your receiving a 50% profit split and a scaled $400,000 account.

Goat Instant Funding Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. There are no profit target requirements. However, there is a 10% scaling target for each level.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%.
  • Stop-loss Risk Per Position – Before entering a trade, the trader is required to define a specific percentage-based stop-loss for each position. There is a maximum risk requirement of 2% for each position.
  • Consistency Rule – The consistency rule ensures that no single trading day accounts for more than 15% of total profits.

What Makes Goat Funded Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

Goat Funded Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluations, a three-step evaluations, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, a scaling plan , first payout on-demand, profit split up to 100%, and multiple add-on features.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Goat Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FundedNext

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFundedNext (Stellar)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe Funded Trader (Rapid)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 8%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Alpha Capital Group

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderAlpha Capital Group
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Standard Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 90%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus (Advanced)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 5%
Maximum Loss10% 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% 4%
Maximum Loss10% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 4% in phase two, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during each evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period ,weekend holding, profit split up to 100%, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunding Pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target4%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss8% 10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target10%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target10%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Maximum Daily Loss4% 5% (Scaleable up to 8%)
Maximum Loss8%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 92.75%

 Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the One-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Blue Guardian

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderBlue Guardian
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6% 6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%85%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFXIFY
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6% 6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

 Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluations phases. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Three-phase Evaluation stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first withdrawal on-demand, numerous add-on features, and profit split up to 100%.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Phase 1 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
6%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target6%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
4%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss8% 8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & RebelsFunding

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderRebelsFunding
Phase 1 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 2 Profit Target6%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target6%
5%
Maximum Daily Loss4%5%
Maximum Loss8% 10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 90%

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements. Standard Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Standard Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFTUK
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss4%❌
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & OFP

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderOFP
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split65% up to 95%26% up to 80%

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There are no withdrawal requirements, only a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss limit rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days. Goat Instant Funding Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, Goat Instant Funding Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader &  Hola Prime

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderHola Prime
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%5%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)5% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% (90% with Add-on)

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderThe5ers
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)10%
Maximum Daily Loss3%3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between Goat Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesGoat Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target❌ (10% For Scaling)❌
Maximum Daily Loss3%6%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)6%, (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days5 Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 100%80% up to 80%

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering seven unique account types: three two-step evaluations, one one-step evaluation, one three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features.

Is Getting Goat Funded Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Goat Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 6% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Standard Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets (10% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 Trading days. they offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 4% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the One-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from the Three-phase Evaluation is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three) coupled with slightly below-average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 3 trading days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 100%.
  • Receiving capital from Standard Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 65% up to 95% profit split.
  • Receiving capital from Goat Instant Funding Program is realistic primarily due to no profit target requirements coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 trading days, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can trade at your preferred pace. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous 80% up to 100% profit split.

After considering all the factors, Goat Funded Trader is highly recommended since you have seven unique funding programs to choose from, three two-step evaluations, a one-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, and two instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

Goat Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 17th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Goat Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, Pro Challenge, One-step Challenge, Three-step Challenge, Standard Instant Funding Program or Goat Instant Funding Program. you will be eligible to receive your first payout on day one if you meet the 3% withdrawal target. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account. Keep in mind that if you decide to request your first profit split on-demand, you will be eligible for a 40% profit split. However, if you request it after 30 calendar days, you will be eligible for an 80% profit split with Goat Challenge, Standard Challenge, and Pro Challenge, Goat Instant Funding Program, while with Standard Instant Funding Program, you will be eligible for a 65% profit split.

When it comes to Goat Funded Trader, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Goat Funded Trader is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Goat Funded Trader Use?

Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets as their broker.

ThinkMarkets is a premium multi-asset online brokerage with headquarters located in London and Melbourne. They provide quick and easy access to a wide range of markets while delivering some of the most recognized trading solutions: MetaTrader 4, MetaTrader 5, and their in-house developed ThinkTrader platform.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with Goat Funded Trader, they allow you to trade on Platform 5, Match-Trader, or TradeLocker.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader is partnered with ThinkMarkets, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:100, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

EUR/CADCAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SEK
EUR/SGDGBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPY
NZD/USDUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/HUFUSD/BRL
USD/CNHUSD/HUFUSD/MXNUSD/TRYUSD/ZAREUR/CZK
EUR/PLNEUR/ZARGBP/ZAREUR/TRY

Commodities

XAU/USDXAU/EURXAG/USDWTIBRENT
NGASCOPPERCPT/USDCORNSOYBEANS
WHEAT

Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40UK100
JPN225NAS100SPX500US30CHINA50
HK50SPAIN35USDINDEXVIXUS2000
TAIEX

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USD
XMR/USDDASH/USDZEC/USDDOT/USDLINK/USD
XTZ/USDEOS/USDADA/USDXLM/USDBAT/USD
DOGE/USDSOL/USDMATIC/USDOMG/USDUNI/USD
SHIB/USDSAND/USDALGO/USDATOM/USDAVAX/USD
BNB/USDMANA/USD

As mentioned above, Goat Funded Trader also allows you to trade a wide range of stocks through ThinkMarkets. To view the full list, please refer to the Spread Account below, which will enable you to log into the trading platform and view the complete list of available stocks.

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 7 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 5 USD / LOT
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
STOCKS 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Platform 5Click here
Match-TraderClick here
TradeLockerClick here

Education

Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as the following seven categories:

  • Trading Tips
  • General
  • Education
  • VIP Goat Traders
  • Affiliate
  • Contest
  • Interview

Additionally, Goat Funded Trader provides its community with a Lot Size Calculator, which was designed to speed up the process of calculating your lot sizes and managing your risk efficiently.

And lastly, Goat Funded Trader also offers a well-designed trading dashboard accessible to all its traders, simplifying the management of risk through the display of trading objectives and associated statistics.

Trustpilot Feedback

Goat Funded Trader has gathered a great score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Goat Funded Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 2,917 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded Goat Funded Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The client has been trading with Goat Funded Trader since its launch, having won a giveaway. They report a positive experience, highlighting the platform’s seamless and automated nature. Praise is given to the smooth and prompt payout process. The client expresses a commitment to Goat Funded Trader as one of their top choices for trading with larger capital in the future, indicating a high level of satisfaction and trust in the prop firm.

The client praises Goat Funded Trader, labeling it as one of the best options available. They highlight several positive aspects, including low commission, tight spreads, on-demand payouts, reliable customer support, and a low challenge price. The overall sentiment is that Goat Funded Trader provides comprehensive coverage for traders, indicating a positive and favorable experience with the platform.

Social Media Statistics

Goat Funded Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Twitter60,000 Followers
YouTube5,790 Subscribers
Instagram36,200 Followers
Discord2,487 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@goatfundedtrader.com
DiscordDiscord Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Goat Funded Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your swap preference, account type, trading platform, account size, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 12% discount on all Goat Funded Trader account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, CentroBill, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Goat Funded Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between seven funding programs: the Goat, Standard, and Pro Challenge, which are a two-step evaluation, One-step Challenge, which are a one-step, Three-step Challenge, which are a three-step, Standard Instant Program Funding and Goat Instant Program Funding, which are a direct funding program.

Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 10% in phase one and 6% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s One-phase Evaluation is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 trading days during the evaluation phase.

Goat Funded Trader’s Three-phase Evaluation is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 100% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 6% in phase one, 6% in phase two, and 6% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 3 Trading days in each evaluation phase.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Standard Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 65% up to 95% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 4% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that Standard Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

On the other hand, Goat Funded Trader’s Goat Instant Funding is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 80% up to 100% profit splits from the start. Traders have no profit target requirements, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during each evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that Goat Instant Funding features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend Goat Funded Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, a scaling plan for daily and maximum drawdown, first payout on-demand, and multiple add-on features. After considering everything Goat Funded Trader has to offer to traders all across the globe, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Goat Funded Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:30 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Goat Funded Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Goat Funded Trader review by commenting below!

The post Goat Funded Trader (12% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/goat-funded-trader/feed/ 0
RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=rebelsfunding https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/#respond Mon, 06 Jul 2020 14:00:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=39635 RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished […]

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

RebelsFunding prioritizes assisting traders in becoming profitable without the need for high initial capital and fears of losses while also having access to excellent technical solutions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $320,000 and receive up to 90% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are RebelsFunding?

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name RIFM, S.R.O., that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They are located in Bratislava, Slovak Republic, and are being managed by CEO Marek Soska. RebelsFunding provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

RebelsFunding headquarters are located at Landererova 8, Bratislava – Staré Mesto 811 09, Slovak Republic.

Who is the CEO of RebelsFunding?

Marek Soska is the CEO of RebelsFunding. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video review

Funding Program Options

RebelsFunding provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Copper Program
  • Bronze Program
  • Silver Program
  • Gold Program
  • Diamond Program

Copper Program

RebelsFunding Copper Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $320,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the four-step evaluation period. The Copper Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$28
$10,000$44
$20,000$77
$40,000$135
$80,000$259
$160,000$499
$320,000$939

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to phase four.

Evaluation phase four requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase four. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all four evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Copper Program Scaling Plan

The Copper Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with an average return of 15% over the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Copper Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Copper Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the four evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 4 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Bronze Program

RebelsFunding Bronze Program provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $160,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Bronze Program allows you to trade with up to 1:200 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$42
$10,000$64
$20,000$104
$40,000$179
$80,000$344
$160,000$669

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Bronze Program Scaling Plan

The Bronze Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 15% over the three-month period or a 5% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Bronze Program for the first time.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Bronze Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for each of the three evaluation phases is 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Silver Program

RebelsFunding Silver Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $80,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Silver Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$35
$5,000$50
$10,000$80
$20,000$130
$40,000$230
$80,000$420

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Silver Program Scaling Plan

The Silver Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Silver Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Silver Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 6 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Gold Program

RebelsFunding Gold Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $2,500 up to $40,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Gold Program allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$2,500$50
$5,000$70
$10,000$100
$20,000$160
$40,000$280

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 14 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Gold Program Scaling Plan

The Gold Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last four months with an average return of 15% over the four-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split increases to 90% after the trader scales their Gold Program for the first time.

Example:

After 4 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 4 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Gold Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 8 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

Diamond Program

RebelsFunding Diamond Program provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $1,000 up to $20,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. The Diamond Program allows you to trade with up to 1:50 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$1,000$50
$2,000$100
$5,000$190
$10,000$360
$20,000$690

By purchasing the Diamond Program, you are awarded a funded account with an initial 10% profit target for phase 1. You must also respect the 6% maximum loss rule while being required to execute a minimum of five trades to qualify for a payout. Your first payout is once you manage to secure a 10% profit, while all other withdrawals can be submitted once you manage to secure a minimum profit of 5% and upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will be 75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Diamond Program Scaling Plan

The Diamon Program also has a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will not be required to forfeit your profits.

Example:

The profit target for the $20,000 funded account is 10%.

Week 1: Generate a profit of 4%.

Week 2: Generate a profit of 6%.

The total generated profit from the last two weeks is 10%, which makes the account eligible for scaling since it is above the required 10% profit target. Your account will be temporarily disabled, and the new account balance will be increased to $32,000.

Diamond Program Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for phase one is 10%. After the first level, there are no profit target requirements.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • Minimal Executed Trades – The minimal number of trades you must execute before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All evaluation phases have a requirement of executing a minimum of 5 trades.
  • No Expert Advisors – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Expert Advisors while engaged in trading activities.

What Makes RebelsFunding Different From Other Prop Firms?

RebelsFunding differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Program prices.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete four phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the four evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. The Copper Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Copper Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 5% in each of the three evaluation phases, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. The Bronze Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Bronze Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, and affordable prices.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe Funded Trader
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target5%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5%❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10%5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split80% up to 90%50% up to 100%

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. The Silver Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Silver Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Fintokei

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFintokei
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingSmart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (6 Minimum Trades)5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%75% up to 90%

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in each evaluation phase. The Gold Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Gold Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss4%3%
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4%
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss4%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6%6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (8 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75% up to 90%80% up to 92.75%

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding account that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. There is an initial 10% profit target, with a 6% maximum loss limit rule. You also have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades during each payout cycle. The Diamond Program also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Diamond Program stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, no evaluation phases, and bi-weekly future payouts.

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & OFP

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingOFP
Profit Target10%❌
Maximum Daily Loss❌3%, 4%, or 5%
Maximum Loss6%6%, 8%, or 10% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%26% up to 80%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingThe5ers
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss❌3% (Daily Pause)
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 100%

Example of comparison between RebelsFunding & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesRebelsFundingFTUK
Profit Target10%❌ (10% For Scaling)
Maximum Daily Loss❌❌
Maximum Loss6%6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days (5 Minimum Trades)No Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split75%50% up to 80%

In conclusion, RebelsFunding differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs.

Is Getting RebelsFunding Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Copper Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all four evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of four trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Bronze Program is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (5% in all three evaluation phases) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Silver Program is realistic primarily due to its below-average profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of six trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Gold Program is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of eight trades. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 90%.
  • Receiving capital from the Diamond Program is realistic primarily due to its average initial profit target of 10% coupled with an average maximum loss rule (6% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a requirement of executing a minimum of five trades. Furthermore, upon successfully generating a profit, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75%.

After considering all the factors, RebelsFunding is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, a four-step evaluation, a three-step evaluation, a two-step evaluation, a one-step evaluation, and an instant funding program, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

RebelsFunding is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 5th of May, 2023. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Copper, Bronze, Silver, or Gold Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Copper or Bronze Program, while the Silver and Gold Program will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 90%.

However, while working with RebelsFunding and reaching funded status with the Diamond Program, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after you manage to generate a 10% profit. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive your payouts if you manage to generate a minimum profit of 5% or upon reaching a profit of 10%, which also automatically scales your account. Your profit split will consist of a generous 75% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Diamond Program.

When it comes to RebelsFunding payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for RebelsFunding is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does RebelsFunding Use?

RebelsFunding doesn’t trade with common broker brands. They are partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with RebelsFunding, they allow you to trade on RF-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, RebelsFunding is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Program that you are participating in.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/CZK
EUR/GBPEUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLN
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZD
GBP/USDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/CZKUSD/HUFUSD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOK
USD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/TRYUSD/ZAR

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPD/USDXPT/USD1NGAS
1USO

Indices

USTECDE30DJ30F40JPN225
STOXX50UK100US500

Stocks

AAPLAMZNBACSCOFB
GOOGHPQIBMNFLXTSLA

Cryptocurrencies

ADA/USDTSOL/USDTBTC/USDTDOGE/USDT
ETH/USDTLTC/USDTNEO/USDT

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
COMMODITIES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
INDICES 2 USD per $100,000 Capital
CRYPTO 2 USD per $100,000 Capital

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
RF-TraderguestROPreviews1Click here

Education

RebelsFunding provides its community with a detailed Blog with educational content, such as:

  • Educational Articles
  • Company Updates
  • Other Articles

RebelsFunding distinguishes itself as a unique proprietary trading company offering a complimentary trial option. This allows traders to acquaint themselves with and adapt to the platform’s trading conditions, minimizing the likelihood of errors when they eventually opt for one of the five available evaluation programs.

Lastly, RebelsFunding grants all clients entry to a trader dashboard meticulously crafted by professionals. This functionality simplifies risk management by providing continual access to comprehensive statistics and objectives, guaranteeing real-time updates.

RebelsFunding Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

RebelsFunding has gathered an excellent score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotRebelsFunding has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 4.3 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 1,473 reviews. Notably, 68% of these reviews have awarded RebelsFunding the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us RebelsFunding being praised as one of the best prop firms, offering one of the best rates and lowest commissions in the industry. The client expresses admiration for the amazing customer support. They highlight the advantage of a 1:200 leverage, emphasizing its potential for earning significant profits. The client also shares their positive experience, currently holding a 10,000 Bronze Program with love for RebelsFunding.

RebelsFunding stands out as one of a few prop firms that provide open access and freedom for everyone to trade in the market. The client appreciates their affordable programs, emphasizing that any individual can participate. They praise the favorable conditions and supportive customer care, suggesting that even in the event of an account setback, it’s worth pursuing another account with RebelsFunding due to the bright future they envision.

Social Media Statistics

RebelsFunding can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook9,400 Followers & 5,800 Likes
Twitter5,864 Followers
Instagram11,300 Followers
YouTube1,730 Subscribers
TikTok617 Followers & 746 Likes
Telegram1,754 Members
Discord15,727 Members

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@rebelsfunding.com
Phone+421 911 611 250
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, Czech, Portuguese, Slovak, Swahili, Thai, Vietnamese

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with RebelsFunding by filling out the registration form with your personal details.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type and account size.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, PayPal, cryptocurrency, and bank wire transfer payment methods.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 15% discount on all RebelsFunding account types.
  • Receive Login Credentials – Find an email with a greeting from RebelsFunding, where you can access your login credentials for your newly purchased trading account.

Conclusion

In conclusion, RebelsFunding is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Copper Program, which is a four-step evaluation, the Bronze Program, which is a three-step evaluation, the Silver Program, which is a two-step evaluation, the Gold Program, which is a one-step evaluation, and the Diamond Program, which is an instant funding program.

RebelsFunding’s Copper Program is a four-step evaluation that requires the completion of four phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all four evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of four trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Copper Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Bronze Program is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a 5% profit target in each evaluation phase to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Bronze Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Silver Program is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of six trades in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Silver Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Gold Program is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 90% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 4% maximum daily and 6% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. However, you are required to execute a minimum of eight trades in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Gold Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

RebelsFunding’s Diamond Program is a direct funding program that allows traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning 75% profit splits from the start. Traders have an initial 10% profit target for phase one, with a 6% maximum loss rule, which are realistic trading objectives. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements. However, you are required to execute a minimum of five trades within each payout cycle. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Diamond Program features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend RebelsFunding to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as an unlimited trading period, low commission fees, first withdrawal after only 14 calendar days, bi-weekly future payouts, no evaluation phases (Diamond Program), and affordable Copper & Bronze Programs. After considering everything RebelsFunding offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of RebelsFunding was last updated on 07.03.2025 at 09:37 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on RebelsFunding and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed RebelsFunding review by commenting below!

The post RebelsFunding Review (15% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/rebelsfunding/feed/ 0
Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=forex-prop-firm https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/#respond Wed, 25 Mar 2020 12:54:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=30822 Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the intention of providing its traders with a comfortable trading environment. That is why they have developed 14 unique funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. […]

The post Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the intention of providing its traders with a comfortable trading environment. That is why they have developed 14 unique funding programs. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $400,000 and receive up to 100% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are Forex Prop Firm?

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name Prosperity Technology LLC that was incorporated in January 2022. They are located in the United States of America and are being managed by CEO Jonathan Dufresne. Forex Prop Firm provides traders with the opportunity to choose between 14 account types, four two-step evaluations, four one-step evaluations, three three-step evaluations, and three instant funding programs while being partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions as their broker.

Forex Prop Firm’s headquarters are located at 1942 Broadway, Suite 314C, Boulder, CO, 80302, US.

Who is the CEO of Forex Prop Firm?

Jonathan Dufresne is the CEO of Forex Prop Firm. Note that we will be adding more information about their CEO in the future. Stay tuned!

Video Review

Funding Program Options

Forex Prop Firm provides its traders with 14 unique funding program options:

  • Two-step Challenge
  • Two-step Pro Challenge
  • Two-step Bear Challenge
  • Two-step Bull Challenge
  • One-step Challenge
  • One-step Pro Challenge
  • One-step Bear Challenge
  • One-step Bull Challenge
  • Three-step Challenge
  • Three-step Bear Challenge
  • Three-step Bull Challenge
  • Pro Instant Funding
  • Advanced Instant Funding
  • Premium Instant Funding

Two-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$85
$10,000$124
$25,000$249
$50,000$389
$100,000$679
$200,000$1,239
$400,000$2,399

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 12% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 35 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase one. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 12% maximum loss rule. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have 60 calendar days to reach the profit target during phase two. Additionally, you are also required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account where you have a minimum withdrawal amount of 3% of the initial account balance. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5% once funded, while evaluation accounts have no maximum daily loss rule.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 12% during the evaluation and a maximum loss of 10% once funded.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • Maximum Trading Period – The maximum trading duration during which you must reach your required profit target and conclude your evaluation phase. The evaluation has a maximum trading period of 35 calendar days for phase one and 60 calendar days for phase two.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Pro Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Pro Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$71
$10,000$94
$25,000$209
$50,000$319
$100,000$549
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Pro Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bear Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$99
$10,000$179
$25,000$299
$50,000$449
$100,000$799
$200,000$1,400
$400,000$2,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 7% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 7% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 6%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 7%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Two-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bull Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Two-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$99
$10,000$179
$25,000$299
$50,000$449
$100,000$799
$200,000$1,400
$400,000$2,899

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Two-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Two-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 10%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 12%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$71
$10,000$94
$25,000$209
$50,000$319
$100,000$549
$200,000$999
$400,000$1,899

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 4% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 4% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 4%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 6%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Pro Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Pro Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$69
$10,000$99
$25,000$199
$50,000$299
$100,000$499
$200,000$949
$400,000$1,799

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 20% while not surpassing their 6% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 20% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 6% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Pro Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 20%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 6%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bear Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$114
$10,000$189
$25,000$319
$50,000$479
$100,000$849
$200,000$1,469
$400,000$2,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 6%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

One-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bull Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The One-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$114
$10,000$189
$25,000$319
$50,000$479
$100,000$849
$200,000$1,469
$400,000$2,999

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in the evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s One-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

One-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$99
$25,000$179
$50,000$259
$100,000$419
$200,000$769
$400,000$1,549

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase three.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 7% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase three. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 7% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is 6% while Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 7%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. All three evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 5 days.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Bear Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bear Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Bear Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$89
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$399
$100,000$699
$200,000$1,299
$400,000$2,499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 7% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 3% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 7% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 6% while not surpassing their 2% maximum daily loss or 4% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 6% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 2% maximum daily loss and 3% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bear Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Bear Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 2 is 7% while Phase 1 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 6%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 2%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 3% during Phase 1, Phase 2, and once funded while having a maximum loss of 4% during Phase 3.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Three-step Bull Challenge

Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bull Challenge provides traders the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to identify talented traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Three-step Bull Challenge allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$89
$10,000$149
$25,000$249
$50,000$399
$100,000$699
$200,000$1,299
$400,000$2,499

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 12% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 5% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 12% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You are only required to respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 15 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted bi-weekly if you meet the 2% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 80% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account. In addition, you will also receive a 10% profit share based on the profit you make in each evaluation phase with your first payout.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Three-step Bull Challenge

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • Extra 5% Profit From Challenge
  • Extra 100% Refundable Fee
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts (Once Funded)

Three-step Bull Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 2 is 12% while Phase 1 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 10%. Funded accounts have a 2% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5% during Phase 1, Phase 2, and once funded while having a maximum loss of 6% during Phase 3.
  • No Trade Copiers – This implies that traders are prohibited from utilizing the services of Trade Copiers while engaged in trading activities.

Pro Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Pro Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Pro Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$200
$25,000$450
$50,000$850
$100,000$1,600
$200,000$3,000
$400,000$5,000

By purchasing Pro Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 35% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Pro Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Pro Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Advanced Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Advanced Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Advanced Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$300
$25,000$700
$50,000$1,300
$100,000$2,500
$200,000$4,800
$400,000$8,800

By purchasing Advanced Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 65% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Advanced Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Advanced Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Premium Instant Funding

Forex Prop Firm’s Premium Instant Funding provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $10,000 up to $400,000. The aim is to allow traders to skip the evaluation altogether and start earning from the start. Premium Instant Funding allows you to trade with up to 1:30 leverage.

Account SizePrice
$10,000$400
$25,000$1,000
$50,000$1,700
$100,000$3,200
$200,000$5,800
$400,000$10,500

By purchasing Premium Instant Funding, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements on your first payout. You must also respect the 5% maximum daily and 5% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted after you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and the 3% profit requirement. Your profit split will be 95% up to 100% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for Forex Prop Firm’s Premium Instant Funding

  • Weekly Payout
  • 100% Profit Split
  • 1% Minimum Profit Requirement For Payouts

Premium Instant Funding Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. Funded accounts have a 3% withdrawal requirement after the first payout.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 5%.
  • Minimum Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase or requesting a withdrawal. Funded Accounts have a minimum trading requirement of 15 trading days before becoming eligible for a payout.

Scaling Plan

All 14 funding programs of Forex Prop Firm have a scaling plan. If a trader manages to reach a 10% profit target, you will be able to scale your account to the next available account size. Please note that if you decide to scale your account, you will be required to forfeit your profits.

Payment Proof

Forex Prop Firm is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated in January 2022. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with Forex Prop Firm and reaching funded status with any of their 14 funding programs, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 14 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 2% or 3% withdrawal target every 14 calendar days, depending on the funding program type. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded account.

However, while working with Forex Prop Firm and reaching funded status with the Pro Instant Funding, Advanced Instant Funding, or Premium Instant Funding, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after meeting the 15 minimum trading day requirement. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you meet the 15 minimum trading day requirement and a minimum profit of 3%. Your profit split will consist of a generous 35% up to 100% based on the profit that you have generated on your Pro Instant Funding program, 65% up to 100% on your Advanced Instant Funding program, and 95% up to 100% on your Premium Instant Funding program.

When it comes to Forex Prop Firm payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof for Forex Prop Firm is their Discord, Telegram, and YouTube channels, where you can find numerous trader interviews and payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does Forex Prop Firm Use?

Forex Prop Firm sets itself apart by not partnering with the typical, well-known broker brands. Instead, they have formed a strategic alliance with a top-tier liquidity provider, ensuring that traders experience the best possible simulated real-market conditions. This partnership offers a high level of reliability, transparency, and efficiency, allowing clients to trade with confidence in a realistic market environment.

When it comes to trading platforms, Forex Prop Firm stands out by providing access to Match-Trader, allowing clients to gain access to a range of tools and features that enhance their trading capabilities, allowing for precise execution, superior analytics, and smooth navigation throughout their trading journey.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, Forex Prop Firm is partnered with a tier-1 liquidity provider with the best simulated real market trading conditions, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, stocks, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:30, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading.

Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/USDCAD/CHFCAD/JPY
CHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USD
USD/CADUSD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/SGDEUR/HUF
EUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/TRYGBP/NZDNZD/CAD
NZD/CHFNZD/JPYSGD/JPYUSD/DKKUSD/HKDUSD/HUF
USD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/PLNUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZARUSD/THBUSD/BRLZAR/JPYMXN/JPYNOK/JPY
CNH/JPYEUR/SGDGBP/SGDNZD/SGDEUR/HKDUSD/CNH
AUD/CNH

Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDXPT/USDXZT/USDXNI/USD
XAU/JPYXAU/EURXAU/AUDXAU/GBPXPD/USD
XAG/EURXAG/JPYUKO/USDUSO/USD

Indices

ASX200EUSTX50FRA40GER30NDX100
UK100US30SPX500JPN225HK50
VIXUS2000USDXSWI20NTH25
CAN60

Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USDBCH/USDXRP/USD
XLM/USDADA/USDTRX/USDAVAX/USDBNB/USD
DOGE/USDDOT/USDFIL/USDICP/USDLINK/USD
MATIC/USDSOL/USDUNI/USDVET/USDSHIB/USD
XMR/USDEOS/USDAAVE/USDALGO/USDATOM/USD
AXS/USDCAKE/USDEGLD/USDFLOW/USDGRT/USD
IOTA/USDMKR/USDNEO/USDRUNE/USDSTX/USD
THETA/USDXTZ/USDMANA/USDARB/USDETC/USD
IMX/USDINJ/USDDSH/USDALCX/USD1INCH/USD
ALPHA/USDAR/USDAUDIO/USDBADGER/USDBAL/USD
BAND/USDBAT/USDBNT/USDCHR/USDCLV/USD
CREAM/USDCRV/USDDENT/USDDODO/USDENJ/USD
FIDA/USDFLM/USDFTM/USDHBAR/USDICX/USD
KNC/USDLINA/USDLRC/USDMTL/USDNEAR/USD
OMG/USDONT/USDPAXG/USDPERP/USDPROM/USD
PUNDIX/USDQTUM/USDRAY/USDREEF/USDREN/USD
SAND/USDSNX/USDSTMX/USDSTORJ/USDSXP/USD
WAVES/USDXEM/USDZIL/USDZRX/USDCHZ/USD
COMP/USDHOT/USDKSM/USDSUSHI/USDZEC/USD
APT/USDLDO/USDAPE/USDQNT/USDAGIX/USD
GALA/USDRNDR/USDFET/USDBLUR/USDCFX/USD
FXS/USDGNO/USDKLAY/USDLUNC/USDMINA/USD
OSMO/USDPEPE/USDROSE/USDSUI/USDXEC/USD
WBTC/USDGMX/USDBTTC/USDTWT/USDNEXO/USD
ASTR/USDMASK/USDCVX/USDTFUEL/USDCELO/USD
ENS/USDDYDX/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX 4.5 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES 4.5 USD / LOT
INDICES 0.45 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 4.5 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
Match-Tradertestemaildemo@FPF.com97#~COtHgWClick here

Education

Forex Prop Firm offers its community a comprehensive and informative Blog section, featuring a wide range of educational content designed to help traders enhance their skills and knowledge. Whether you’re a beginner or an experienced trader, the blog provides valuable insights, strategies, and updates to keep you informed about the latest trends in the forex market.

In addition, Forex Prop Firm provides all clients with access to an intuitive and well-structured dashboard. This user-friendly tool streamlines risk management by bringing together key trading objectives, performance metrics, and statistics in one centralized location.

Trustpilot Feedback

Forex Prop Firm has gathered an average score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On Trustpilot, Forex Prop Firm has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an impressive rating of 3.1 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 995 reviews. Notably, 65% of these reviews have awarded Forex Prop Firm the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows that the client is satisfied with Forex Prop Firm, considering it a great Forex funding company. They highlight the swift provision of login credentials within 48 hours after passing the two-step evaluation. The client appreciates the unique practice of allowing an immediate agreement signing upon purchasing the challenge and receiving a certificate upon successfully passing the challenge. Overall, they express no regrets about working with this prop firm.

The client praises Forex Prop Firm as an amazing prop firm, emphasizing their timely and helpful responses to questions, making the process straightforward. Upon passing, they commend the quick outreach and prompt establishment of the live account, expressing love for the company.

Social Media Statistics

Forex Prop Firm can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Instagram50,100 Followers
Twitter11,800 Followers
YouTube16,300 Subscribers
Telegram2,756 Members
Discord19,844 Members
Tik Tok183 Followers & 22 Likes

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@forexpropfirm.com
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Supported LanguagesEnglish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with Forex Prop Firm by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your account type, account size, and add-on features.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code FOREXPROPREVIEWS and enjoy a 50% discount on all Forex Prop Firm account types.
  • Choose Your Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card, Snappay, and cryptocurrency payment methods.

Conclusion

In conclusion, Forex Prop Firm is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between 14 funding programs: the Two-step Challenge, Two-step Pro Challenge, Two-step Bear Challenge, and Two-step Bull Challenge, which are two-step evaluations, the One-step Challenge, One-step Pro Challenge, One-step Bear Challenge, and One-step Bull Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, the Three-step Challenge, Three-step Bear Challenge, and Three-step Bull Challenge, which are three-step evaluations, and Pro Instant Funding, Advanced Instant Funding, and Premium Instant Funding, which are direct funding programs.

I would recommend Forex Prop Firm to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with special features, such as an unlimited trading period, no minimum trading day requirements, enormous flexibility with 14 unique funding program types, three unique Instant Funding programs, numerous add-on features, bi-weekly withdrawals (weekly with add-on), a profit split of up to 100%, and a 10% profit share from demo phases (except Instant Funding). After considering everything Forex Prop Firm offers to traders worldwide, they are indeed a desirable choice within the prop trading industry.

Our detailed review of Forex Prop Firm was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 12:10 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on Forex Prop Firm and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed Forex Prop Firm review by commenting below!

The post Forex Prop Firm Review (50% discount code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/forex-prop-firm/feed/ 0
The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/?utm_source=rss&utm_medium=rss&utm_campaign=the-funded-trader-program https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/#comments Sun, 24 Feb 2019 20:11:00 +0000 https://forexpropreviews.com/?post_type=casino&p=2219 The Funded Trader is searching for passionate and experienced traders who will succeed with their funds’ help by showing skills in unpredictable market conditions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading […]

The post The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>

The Funded Trader is searching for passionate and experienced traders who will succeed with their funds’ help by showing skills in unpredictable market conditions. Traders have the opportunity to earn substantial profits, with the flexibility to manage account sizes up to $200,000 and receive up to 95% profit splits. This can be accomplished through trading various financial instruments, including forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies.

Who are The Funded Trader?

The Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm with the legal name The Funded Trader LLC that was incorporated on the 12th of May, 2021. They are located in Liberty Hill, Texas, and are being managed by CEO Angelo Ciaramello. The Funded Trader provides traders with the opportunity to choose between five account types, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation, while being partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD as their brokers.

The Funded Trader headquarters are located at 14001 W HWY 29, Suite 102, Liberty Hill, TX 78642.

Who is the CEO of The Funded Trader?

Angelo Ciaramello is a 29-year-old entrepreneur from New Jersey that has founded The Funded Trader back in 2020. His company started as a startup that gamified capital markets retail trading. The goal was to provide an opportunity for individual traders who would compete to get funded and make the top spot on the rankings leaderboard.

Angelo and his team managed to develop multiple funding challenges that provide individuals with the opportunity to trade the company’s capital and receive percentage-based profit splits. One of his greater achievements in life was that he was recognized as one of the top 25 Financial Technology Leaders of New Jersey for the year 2022.

Anyone interested in following Angelo Ciaramello can do so by following his Instagram and LinkedIn. This way, you will be able to see more of his posts and what he’s up to on a daily basis.

Video Review

Funding Program Options

The Funded Trader provides its traders with five unique funding program options:

  • Royal Pro Challenge
  • Royal Challenge
  • Knight Pro Challenge
  • Knight Challenge
  • Dragon Challenge

Royal Pro Challenge

The Funded Trader Royal Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $25,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Royal Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$25,000$239
$50,000$470
$100,000$949
$200,000$1,890

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five profitable trading days in order to proceed to phase two. You must also follow the 3% daily cap rule in Phase 1. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five profitable trading days in order to proceed to a funded account. You must also follow the 1,5% daily cap rule in Phase 2. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 3 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted also in 3 calendar days. Your profit split will be 75% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You must also follow the 2% daily cap rule in Funded stage. If your balance or floating equity exceeds this limit, all trades will be automatically closed, and your account will be paused until the next day.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge

  1. 85% profit split or 95% profit split

Royal Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Royal Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader make an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Royal Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum duration during which you must engage in trading before successfully concluding an evaluation phase. Both evaluation phases have a minimum trading day requirement of 1 days.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.

Royal Challenge

The Funded Trader Royal Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the two-step evaluation period. The Royal Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:50.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$60
$10,000$120
$25,000$189
$50,000$289
$100,000$489
$200,000$1,158

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to phase two.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase two. However, you are required to trade a minimum of five trading days in order to proceed to a funded account.

By completing both evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 30 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can be submitted bi-weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 92.75% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge

  1. First Withdrawal After 14 Calendar Days

Royal Challenge Scaling Plan

The Royal Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with If a trader make an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 92.75%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Royal Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 requires reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 5 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where you must make a profit of 0.1% per day.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

Knight Pro Challenge

The Funded Trader Knight Pro Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Knight Pro Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$65
$10,000$105
$25,000$195
$50,000$295
$100,000$495
$200,000$945

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 8% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no maximum trading day requirements during phase one. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in order to proceed to funded status.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is on-demand from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted on an on-demand basis. Your profit split will be 80% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Knight Pro Challenge Scaling Plan

The Knight Pro Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 10% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Knight Pro Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%.
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 8%.
  • Minimum Profitable Trading Days – The minimum profitable trading day requirement you must meet before you can successfully conclude an evaluation phase. The evaluation phase has a 3 minimum profitable trading day requirement, where you must make a profit of 0.25% per day.
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • Consistency Rule – Mandates traders to maintain uniformity in various aspects such as position sizes, risk management, losses, gains, and more. This implies that the account results should not exhibit significant variations in their characteristics. The profits earned on your best trading day should not exceed 50% of your total profits. (Only applies to Funded Status)

Knight Challenge

The Funded Trader Knight Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $200,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout a one-step evaluation period. The Knight Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:30.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$59
$10,000$99
$25,000$189
$50,000$289
$100,000$489
$200,000$939

The evaluation phase requires a trader to reach a profit target of 10% while not surpassing their 3% maximum daily loss or 6% maximum trailing loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 10% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum trailing loss limit rules.

By completing the evaluation phase, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 3% maximum daily loss and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 80% up to 90% based on the profit you make on your funded account.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge

  1. Additional Drawdown (4% Maximum Daily Loss & 7% Maximum Trailing Loss)

Knight Challenge Scaling Plan

The Knight Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 5%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 8% through the scaling plan.

Example:

After 3 Months: A qualified $100,000 account increases to $125,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $125,000 account increases to $150,000.

After the Next 3 Months: A qualified $150,000 account increases to $175,000.

And so on…

Knight Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for the evaluation phase is 10%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 3%. (4% with Add-on or after scaling for the first time)
  • Maximum Trailing Loss – The difference between the highest achieved account balance and the lowest point of the drawdown determines the maximum trailing loss a trader is allowed to lose without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum trailing loss of 6%. (7% with Add-on)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

Dragon Challenge

The Funded Trader Dragon Challenge provides traders with the opportunity to manage account sizes ranging from $5,000 up to $100,000. The aim is to identify disciplined traders who are profitable and can efficiently manage risk throughout the three-step evaluation period. The Dragon Challenge allows you to trade with leverage up to 1:100.

Account SizePrice
$5,000$49
$10,000$99
$25,000$135
$50,000$205
$100,000$355

Evaluation phase one requires a trader to reach a profit target of 8% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase one. To proceed to phase two, you are only required to reach the 8% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase two requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase two. To proceed to phase three, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

Evaluation phase three also requires a trader to reach a profit target of 5% while not surpassing their 5% maximum daily loss or 10% maximum loss rules. When it comes to time limitations, note that you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during phase three. To proceed to funded status, you are only required to reach the 5% profit target without breaching the maximum daily or maximum loss limit rules.

By completing all three evaluation phases, you are awarded a funded account with no minimum withdrawal requirements. You must only respect the 5% maximum daily loss and 10% maximum loss rules. Your first payout is 7 calendar days from the day you place your first position on your funded account, while all other withdrawals can also be submitted weekly. Your profit split will be 75% up to 95% based on the profit you make on your funded account. You should also note that you are able to scale your maximum daily drawdown up to 6% and maximum drawdown up to 12%.

Add-ons for The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge

  1. 95% Profit Split

Dragon Challenge Scaling Plan

The Dragon Challenge also has a scaling plan. If a trader is profitable for at least two out of the last three months with either an average return of 6% over the three-month period or a 2% return each month during the three-month period, then you will become eligible for an account size increase equal to 25% of the initial account size. The profit split can increase up to 95%, the maximum daily loss can increase up to 6%, and the maximum trailing loss can increase up to 12% through the scaling plan.

Dragon Challenge Trading Rules & Objectives

  • Profit Target – Traders must achieve a designated profit percentage to successfully conclude an evaluation phase, withdraw earnings, or scale their trading account. The profit target for Phase 1 is set at 8%, whereas Phase 2 and Phase 3 require reaching a profit target of 5%. Funded accounts do not have any specified profit targets.
  • Maximum Daily Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose in a single trading day without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum daily loss of 5%. (Scaleable up to 7%)
  • Maximum Loss – The maximum loss limit a trader is allowed to lose overall without breaching the account. All account sizes have a maximum loss of 10%. (Scaleable up to 12%)
  • No Martingale – Traders are prohibited from employing any form of martingale strategy during their trading activities.
  • No Weekend Holding – Traders are prohibited from holding trades during the weekend, meaning that all trades should be closed before the Friday market close. (Swing Dragon Challenge can hold trades during the weekend)
  • No News trading – There are restrictions in place for 2 minutes before and after the release of a red folder event. During this 4-minute window, opening or closing market orders, executing pending limit orders, and triggering take profit or stop-loss orders are all restricted.

What Makes The Funded Trader Different From Other Prop Firms?

The Funded Trader differs from most industry-leading prop firms due to offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, an unlimited trading period, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge.

The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 Profitable Trading days in each evaluation phase. The Royal Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. You must also follow the daily cap rule in both evaluation phases and in funded stage. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Royal Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, allowing Expert Advisors, and 3 days withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FTMO

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)FTMO
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%80% up to 90%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Smart Prop Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)Smart Prop Trader (Standard)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%7%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 28%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal)FXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Profitable Trading Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%75% up to 92.75%

The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge is a two-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete two phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. The Royal Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Royal Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, allowing Expert Advisors, and bi-weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)E8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss10%8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)Funding pips
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5% (Scaleable up to 7%)
Maximum Loss10%10% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%75% up to60% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FXIFY

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded Trader (Royal Pro)FXIFY
Phase 1 Profit Target8%10%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%5%
Maximum Daily Loss5%5%
Maximum Loss10%10%
Minimum Trading Days5 Calendar Days5 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 92.75%75% up to 90%

The Funded Trader’s Knight Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase. The Knight Pro Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Knight Pro Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, an above-average daily drawdown and maximum drawdown, and on-demand payouts.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Goat Funded Trader

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderGoat Funded Trader
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%75% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & FTUK

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFTUK
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4%
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)8% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days4 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%50% up to 80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funding Pips

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFunding Pips
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss5%4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss8% (Trailing)6%  (Scaleable up to 10%)
Minimum Trading Days3 Profitable Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 100% + Monthly Salary

The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete a single phase before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 10%, with a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase. The Knight Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Knight Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, a daily drawdown and maximum drawdown add-on, and weekly withdrawals.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & PipFarm

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderPipFarm (Static)
Profit Target10%12%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)3%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6%
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days3 Calendar Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%70% up to 95%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & Funded Trading Plus

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderFunded Trading Plus
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)4%
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6% (Trailing)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 100%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & MyFundedFX

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderMyFundedFX
Profit Target10%10%
Maximum Daily Loss3% (4% with Add-on)4% (Scaleable up to 6%)
Maximum Loss6% (Trailing)(7% with Add-on)6% (Trailing)(Scaleable up to 12%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodUnlimitedUnlimited
Profit Split80% up to 95%80% up to 92.75%

The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires traders to successfully complete three phases before becoming eligible for payouts. The profit target is 8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three, with a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules. You also have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases. The Dragon Challenge also has a unique scaling plan, allowing traders to manage even larger account sizes. Compared to other funding programs within the industry, the Dragon Challenge stands out mainly for having an unlimited trading period, balance-based drawdown, weekly withdrawals, and affordable evaluation fees.

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & E8 Markets

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderE8 Markets
Phase 1 Profit Target8%8%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%4%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%4%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 6%)4%
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 12%)8% (Scaleable up to 14%)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%80%

Example of comparison between The Funded Trader & The5ers

Trading ObjectivesThe Funded TraderThe5ers (Bootcamp)
Phase 1 Profit Target8%6%
Phase 2 Profit Target5%6%
Phase 3 Profit Target5%6%
Maximum Daily Loss5% (Scaleable up to 6%)❌ (3% Daily Pause Once Funded)
Maximum Loss10% (Scaleable up to 12%)5% (4% Once Funded)
Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading DaysNo Minimum Trading Days
Maximum Trading PeriodPhase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Phase 1: Unlimited
Phase 2: Unlimited
Phase 3: Unlimited
Profit Split75% up to 95%50% up to 100%

In conclusion, The Funded Trader differs from other industry-leading prop firms by offering five unique account types: two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation. In addition, they also provide numerous favorable features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, unlimited trading periods, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge.

Is Getting The Funded Trader Capital Realistic?

It is essential to evaluate the achievability of trading requirements when considering proprietary trading firms that align with your forex trading style. While a company may appear attractive with a high percentage profit split on a generously funded account, the practicality decreases if they demand substantial monthly gains with minimal maximum drawdown percentages, significantly reducing the likelihood of success. Additionally, examining time constraints is crucial, with an unlimited trading period being more advantageous as it eliminates the pressure associated with time constraints. Lastly, it is essential to acquaint yourself with all trading rules during the evaluation process and subsequent funding stages to mitigate the risk of accidentally violating your trading account terms.

  • Receiving capital from the Royal Challenge Pro is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum Profitable trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. You have also follow the daily cap rule in both evolutions phases and funded stage. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Royal Challenge is realistic primarily due to its modest profit targets (8% in phase one and 5% in phase two) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum trading day requirement of 5 calendar days. Furthermore, upon successfully completing both evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 92.75%.
  • Receiving capital from the Knight Pro Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with above-average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that you have no maximum trading day requirements while having a minimum of 3 profitable trading day requirements in the evaluation phase. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Knight Challenge is realistic primarily due to its average profit target of 10% coupled with average maximum loss rules (3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing the evaluation phase, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 80% up to 95%.
  • Receiving capital from the Dragon Challenge is realistic primarily due to its relatively modest profit targets, despite the additional evaluation phase (8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase 3) coupled with average maximum loss rules (5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss). It is important to note that there are no minimum or maximum trading day requirements, offering flexibility without time constraints, meaning that you can secure funding swiftly in a day or proceed at your preferred trading pace. Furthermore, upon successfully completing all three evaluation phases, participants qualify for payouts featuring an advantageous profit split of 75% up to 95%.

After considering all the factors, The Funded Trader is highly recommended since you have five unique funding programs to choose from, two two-step evaluations, two one-step evaluations, and a three-step evaluation, which all feature realistic trading objectives and conditions for qualifying for payouts.

Payment Proof

The Funded Trader is a proprietary trading firm that was incorporated on the 12th of May, 2021. They have a large community of traders who have reached funded status and successfully qualify for a profit split.

While working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Royal Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 30 calendar days (14 calendar days with Add-on). However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 14 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous will consist of a generous 75% up to 92.75% based on the profit that you have generated on your Royal Challenge. However, the first three payouts cannot be more than 5%.

While working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Royal Pro Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after 3 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 3 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous will consist of a generous 75% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your Royal Pro Challenge.

However, while working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Knight or Dragon Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout after only 7 calendar days. However, after your first payout, you will be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed the initial account size every 7 calendar days. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 90% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Knight Challenge, while the Dragon Challenge will provide you with a generous profit split of 75% up to 95%.

And lastly, while working with The Funded Trader and reaching funded status with the Knight Pro Challenge, you will be eligible to receive your first payout on-demand by meeting the consistency criteria. However, after your first payout, you will also be eligible to receive payouts if you exceed your initial account size on an on-demand basis if the consistency criteria is met. Your profit split will consist of a generous 80% up to 95% based on the profit that you have generated on your funded Knight Pro Challenge.

When it comes to The Funded Trader payment proof, you can find it on numerous websites. One example is Trustpilot, where their traders comment regarding their experience while working with the company as well as the process of how they successfully received payouts. Another source of payment proof of The Funded Trader is their Discord channel, where you can find numerous payout certificates of the most successful traders.

Examples of Payout Certificates and Payment Proof can be seen in the images below.

Which Broker Does The Funded Trader Use?

The Funded Trader is partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD as their broker.

As for trading platforms, while you are working with The Funded Trader, they allow you to trade on cTrader if you choose Voyage Markets, on MetaTrader 5 if you choose Thaurus LTD, and on Match-Trader.

Trading Instruments

As mentioned above, The Funded Trader is partnered with Voyage Markets and Thaurus LTD, and they allow you to trade a wide range of trading instruments, which include forex pairs, commodities, indices, and cryptocurrencies with a leverage of up to 1:200, depending on the trading instrument that you are trading and the Challenge that you are participating in.

Voyage Markets Forex Pairs

CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBPEUR/JPY
EUR/USDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/USDUSD/CAD
USD/CHFUSD/JPYAUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZD
AUD/USDCAD/CHFEUR/AUDEUR/NOKEUR/NZDEUR/SGD
GBP/AUDGBP/NZDNZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USD
USD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDEUR/ZAREUR/HUFUSD/MXN
USD/ZAREUR/PLNUSD/TRYEUR/TRY

Voyage Markets Commodities

XAU/USDXAG/USDWTIBRENT

Voyage Markets Indices

AUS200ESTX50FRA40GER40JPN225
NAS100SPX500UK100US30

Voyage Markets Cryptocurrencies

BTC/USDBCH/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Thaurus LTD Forex Pairs

AUD/CADAUD/CHFAUD/JPYAUD/NZDAUD/USDCAD/CHF
CAD/JPYCHF/JPYEUR/AUDEUR/CADEUR/CHFEUR/GBP
EUR/HUFEUR/JPYEUR/NZDEUR/PLNEUR/TRYEUR/USD
GBP/AUDGBP/CADGBP/CHFGBP/JPYGBP/NZDGBP/USD
NZD/CADNZD/CHFNZD/JPYNZD/USDUSD/CADUSD/CHF
USD/JPYUSD/MXNUSD/NOKUSD/SEKUSD/SGDUSD/TRY
USD/ZARUSD/PLNUSD/HUF

Thaurus LTD Commodities

XAG/USDXAU/USDBRENTCL

Thaurus LTD Indices

ASXDAXDOWFTSENIKKEI
NSDQSPSTOXX50

Thaurus LTD Cryptocurrencies

BCH/USDBTC/USDETH/USDLTC/USD

Trading Fees

Trading Commission

Trading InstrumentCommission Fee
FOREX4 USD / LOT
COMMODITIES1 USD / LOT (0 USD / LOT on Oil)
INDICES 0 USD / LOT
CRYPTO 0 USD / LOT

Spread Account

To check the live spreads, log in to the trading account below.

PlatformServerLogin NumberPasswordDownload Platform
MetaTrader 5Click here
cTraderClick here
Match-TraderClick here

Education

The Funded Trader provides its community with a detailed Media section with educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • Community Update – Latest news and updates
  • Company Announcements – Latest announcements regarding TFT
  • FAQ – Video form of frequently asked questions
  • Podcasts – Educational podcasts with successful traders
  • Spanish FAQ – Video form of frequently asked questions in the Spanish language
  • Trader Interviews – TFT Trader interviews

Additionally, we can also find a detailed Blog within the Media section, which includes educational content, such as the following six categories:

  • Trader Interviews – TFT Trader interviews
  • Trading Psychology – Educational trading psychology content
  • Trading Systems – Educational content for beginners
  • Trading Tips – Educational articles about trading suggestions, guides, and essential aspects of trading
  • Company Updates – Latest announcements of company updates
  • Industry News – Educational articles on the prop industry changes

The Funded Trader stands out as an exclusive proprietary trading company that provides a complimentary trial option. This enables traders to familiarize themselves with and adjust to the platform’s trading conditions, reducing the chances of errors when they eventually choose one of the five evaluation programs offered.

And lastly, The Funded Trader also provides all clients access to a professionally designed trader dashboard. This feature streamlines risk management by offering constant access to detailed statistics and objectives, ensuring real-time updates every minute of the day. This enhancement contributes to an overall improved user experience.

The Funded Trader Trading Dashboard

Trustpilot Feedback

The Funded Trader has gathered an average score on Trustpilot based on their community’s feedback.

On TrustpilotThe Funded Trader has a large variety of their community commenting and providing positive feedback regarding their company services. The firm has achieved an average rating of 3.2 out of 5 from a substantial pool of 21,083 reviews. Notably, 67% of these reviews have awarded The Funded Trader the highest rating of 5 stars.

The first comment shows us The Funded Trader receiving positive acclaim as a reputable company, with a community member expressing satisfaction and a trouble-free experience. The client appreciates the consistent availability of promotions, rewards, discounts, and prizes, expressing the hope that this favorable aspect will be maintained at its current level.

Additionally, The Funded Trader is highly praised as an exceptional proprietary trading firm, often regarded as the best in the industry. The client highlights its standout features, including low commissions, tight spreads, prompt support, fast payouts, and numerous other positive attributes. They express a strong recommendation for TFT to anyone seeking to trade with a prop firm.

Social Media Statistics

The Funded Trader can also be found on numerous social media platforms.

Facebook21,000 Followers & 15,000 Likes
Instagram125,000 Followers
Telegram19,178 Members
Discord106,016 Members
YouTube102,000 Subscribers
Twitter99,200 Followers
Reddit5,500 Members
TikTok48,800 Followers & 455,100 Likes

Customer Support

Live Chat✅
Emailsupport@thefundedtraderprogram.com
Phone(888) 920-3079
DiscordDiscord Link
TelegramTelegram Link
FAQFAQ Link
Help Center❌
WhatsApp❌
Messenger❌
Supported LanguagesEnglish, French, Portuguese, Spanish

Account Opening Process

  • Registration Form – Register with The Funded Trader by filling out the registration form with your personal details and logging into the trading dashboard.
  • Choose Your Account – Choose your challenge type, account size, trading platform, broker, account type, and add-ons.
  • Apply Discount Code – Apply our discount code forexpropreviews and enjoy a 10% discount on all The Funded Trader challenge types.
  • Choose Payment Method – Choose between a credit/debit card and cryptocurrency payment method after you have successfully applied our discount code.

Conclusion

In conclusion, The Funded Trader is a reputable and trustworthy proprietary trading firm providing traders with an opportunity to choose between five funding programs: the Royal Pro Challenges and Royal Challenges, which are a two-step evaluation, the Knight Pro Challenge and Knight Challenge, which are one-step evaluations, and the Dragon Challenge, which is a three-step evaluation.

The Funded Trader’s Royal Pro Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 5 Profitable trading days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Royal Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance

The Funded Trader’s Royal Challenge is an industry-standard two-step evaluation that requires the completion of two phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 92.75% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one and 5% in phase two to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to trade for a minimum of 5 calendar days in each evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Royal Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Knight Pro Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 8% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no maximum trading day requirements during either evaluation phase. However, you are required to have a minimum of 3 profitable trading days in the evaluation phase. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Knight Pro Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Knight Challenge is a one-step evaluation that requires the completion of a single phase before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 80% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach a profit target of 10% to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 3% maximum daily and 6% maximum trailing loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during the evaluation phase, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Knight Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

The Funded Trader’s Dragon Challenge is a three-step evaluation that requires the completion of three phases before becoming eligible to manage a funded account and earn 75% up to 95% profit splits. Traders must reach profit targets of 8% in phase one, 5% in phase two, and 5% in phase three to become successfully funded. These are realistic trading objectives, considering you have a 5% maximum daily and 10% maximum loss rules to follow. Regarding time limitations, you have no minimum or maximum trading day requirements during all three evaluation phases, meaning that you can trade based on your preferred pace without any time pressure. Finally, it’s essential to note that the Dragon Challenge features a scaling plan, providing you with the opportunity to increase your initial account balance.

I would recommend The Funded Trader to individuals seeking a reputable proprietary trading firm that provides exceptional trading conditions catering to a diverse range of individuals with unique trading styles. They provide traders with unique features, such as add-ons for specific Challenge accounts, unlimited trading periods, 3 days, weekly and bi-weekly withdrawals, and an affordable Dragon Challenge. After considering everything The Funded Trader has to offer to traders all across the globe, they can undoubtedly be regarded as one of the industry-leading prop firms.

Our detailed review of The Funded Trader was last updated on 02.04.2025 at 11:09 (CE(S)T).

What are your individual opinions on The Funded Trader and the services they offer? Do they align with the trading conditions and services you’ve been seeking?

Let us know if you enjoyed our detailed The Funded Trader review by commenting below!

The post The Funded Trader Review (10% Discount Code: FOREXPROPREVIEWS) appeared first on Forex Prop Reviews.

]]>
https://forexpropreviews.com/Proprietary-Trading-Firm/the-funded-trader-program/feed/ 22